Mercurial > vim
annotate runtime/doc/eval.txt @ 3398:d1096a4e96bd v7.3.465
updated for version 7.3.465
Problem: Cannot get file name with newline from glob().
Solution: Add argument to glob() and expand() to indicate they must return a
list. (Christian Brabandt)
| author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Wed, 07 Mar 2012 19:18:23 +0100 |
| parents | b7811ab264bf |
| children | 94601b379f38 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 3312 | 1 *eval.txt* For Vim version 7.3. Last change: 2012 Jan 28 |
| 1621 | 2 |
| 3 | |
| 4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar | |
| 7 | 5 |
| 6 | |
| 7 Expression evaluation *expression* *expr* *E15* *eval* | |
| 8 | |
| 9 Using expressions is introduced in chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|. | |
| 10 | |
| 11 Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time. If this has been | |
| 1621 | 12 done, the features in this document are not available. See |+eval| and |
| 99 | 13 |no-eval-feature|. |
| 7 | 14 |
| 85 | 15 1. Variables |variables| |
| 16 1.1 Variable types | |
| 87 | 17 1.2 Function references |Funcref| |
| 161 | 18 1.3 Lists |Lists| |
| 99 | 19 1.4 Dictionaries |Dictionaries| |
| 20 1.5 More about variables |more-variables| | |
| 85 | 21 2. Expression syntax |expression-syntax| |
| 22 3. Internal variable |internal-variables| | |
| 23 4. Builtin Functions |functions| | |
| 24 5. Defining functions |user-functions| | |
| 25 6. Curly braces names |curly-braces-names| | |
| 26 7. Commands |expression-commands| | |
| 27 8. Exception handling |exception-handling| | |
| 28 9. Examples |eval-examples| | |
| 29 10. No +eval feature |no-eval-feature| | |
| 30 11. The sandbox |eval-sandbox| | |
| 634 | 31 12. Textlock |textlock| |
| 7 | 32 |
| 33 {Vi does not have any of these commands} | |
| 34 | |
| 35 ============================================================================== | |
| 36 1. Variables *variables* | |
| 37 | |
| 85 | 38 1.1 Variable types ~ |
| 114 | 39 *E712* |
| 1621 | 40 There are six types of variables: |
| 41 | |
| 3082 | 42 Number A 32 or 64 bit signed number. |expr-number| *Number* |
| 99 | 43 Examples: -123 0x10 0177 |
| 44 | |
| 1621 | 45 Float A floating point number. |floating-point-format| *Float* |
| 46 {only when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 47 Examples: 123.456 1.15e-6 -1.1e3 | |
| 48 | |
| 99 | 49 String A NUL terminated string of 8-bit unsigned characters (bytes). |
| 1621 | 50 |expr-string| Examples: "ab\txx\"--" 'x-z''a,c' |
| 99 | 51 |
| 52 Funcref A reference to a function |Funcref|. | |
| 53 Example: function("strlen") | |
| 54 | |
| 55 List An ordered sequence of items |List|. | |
| 56 Example: [1, 2, ['a', 'b']] | |
| 55 | 57 |
| 370 | 58 Dictionary An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a |
| 59 value. |Dictionary| | |
| 60 Example: {'blue': "#0000ff", 'red': "#ff0000"} | |
| 61 | |
| 55 | 62 The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they |
| 63 are used. | |
| 7 | 64 |
| 65 Conversion from a Number to a String is by making the ASCII representation of | |
| 2581 | 66 the Number. Examples: |
| 67 Number 123 --> String "123" ~ | |
| 68 Number 0 --> String "0" ~ | |
| 69 Number -1 --> String "-1" ~ | |
| 2152 | 70 *octal* |
| 7 | 71 Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits |
| 72 to a number. Hexadecimal "0xf9" and Octal "017" numbers are recognized. If | |
| 2581 | 73 the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero. Examples: |
| 74 String "456" --> Number 456 ~ | |
| 75 String "6bar" --> Number 6 ~ | |
| 76 String "foo" --> Number 0 ~ | |
| 77 String "0xf1" --> Number 241 ~ | |
| 78 String "0100" --> Number 64 ~ | |
| 79 String "-8" --> Number -8 ~ | |
| 80 String "+8" --> Number 0 ~ | |
| 7 | 81 |
| 82 To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: > | |
| 83 :echo "0100" + 0 | |
| 782 | 84 < 64 ~ |
| 85 | |
| 86 To avoid a leading zero to cause octal conversion, or for using a different | |
| 87 base, use |str2nr()|. | |
| 7 | 88 |
| 89 For boolean operators Numbers are used. Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE. | |
| 90 | |
| 91 Note that in the command > | |
| 92 :if "foo" | |
| 93 "foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE. To test for a non-empty string, | |
| 94 use strlen(): > | |
| 95 :if strlen("foo") | |
| 153 | 96 < *E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731* |
| 97 List, Dictionary and Funcref types are not automatically converted. | |
| 85 | 98 |
| 1621 | 99 *E805* *E806* *E808* |
| 100 When mixing Number and Float the Number is converted to Float. Otherwise | |
| 101 there is no automatic conversion of Float. You can use str2float() for String | |
| 102 to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number. | |
| 103 | |
| 104 *E706* *sticky-type-checking* | |
| 85 | 105 You will get an error if you try to change the type of a variable. You need |
| 106 to |:unlet| it first to avoid this error. String and Number are considered | |
| 1621 | 107 equivalent though, as well are Float and Number. Consider this sequence of |
| 108 commands: > | |
| 85 | 109 :let l = "string" |
| 87 | 110 :let l = 44 " changes type from String to Number |
| 1621 | 111 :let l = [1, 2, 3] " error! l is still a Number |
| 112 :let l = 4.4 " changes type from Number to Float | |
| 113 :let l = "string" " error! | |
| 85 | 114 |
| 115 | |
| 87 | 116 1.2 Function references ~ |
| 153 | 117 *Funcref* *E695* *E718* |
| 1621 | 118 A Funcref variable is obtained with the |function()| function. It can be used |
| 114 | 119 in an expression in the place of a function name, before the parenthesis |
| 120 around the arguments, to invoke the function it refers to. Example: > | |
| 55 | 121 |
| 122 :let Fn = function("MyFunc") | |
| 123 :echo Fn() | |
| 114 | 124 < *E704* *E705* *E707* |
| 819 | 125 A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:", "t:" or "b:". You |
| 126 cannot have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name. | |
| 85 | 127 |
| 114 | 128 A special case is defining a function and directly assigning its Funcref to a |
| 129 Dictionary entry. Example: > | |
| 130 :function dict.init() dict | |
| 131 : let self.val = 0 | |
| 132 :endfunction | |
| 133 | |
| 134 The key of the Dictionary can start with a lower case letter. The actual | |
| 135 function name is not used here. Also see |numbered-function|. | |
| 136 | |
| 137 A Funcref can also be used with the |:call| command: > | |
| 138 :call Fn() | |
| 139 :call dict.init() | |
| 85 | 140 |
| 141 The name of the referenced function can be obtained with |string()|. > | |
| 119 | 142 :let func = string(Fn) |
| 85 | 143 |
| 144 You can use |call()| to invoke a Funcref and use a list variable for the | |
| 145 arguments: > | |
| 119 | 146 :let r = call(Fn, mylist) |
| 85 | 147 |
| 148 | |
| 87 | 149 1.3 Lists ~ |
| 161 | 150 *List* *Lists* *E686* |
| 55 | 151 A List is an ordered sequence of items. An item can be of any type. Items |
| 1621 | 152 can be accessed by their index number. Items can be added and removed at any |
| 55 | 153 position in the sequence. |
| 154 | |
| 85 | 155 |
| 156 List creation ~ | |
| 157 *E696* *E697* | |
| 55 | 158 A List is created with a comma separated list of items in square brackets. |
| 85 | 159 Examples: > |
| 160 :let mylist = [1, two, 3, "four"] | |
| 161 :let emptylist = [] | |
| 55 | 162 |
| 1621 | 163 An item can be any expression. Using a List for an item creates a |
| 842 | 164 List of Lists: > |
| 85 | 165 :let nestlist = [[11, 12], [21, 22], [31, 32]] |
| 55 | 166 |
| 167 An extra comma after the last item is ignored. | |
| 168 | |
| 85 | 169 |
| 170 List index ~ | |
| 171 *list-index* *E684* | |
| 55 | 172 An item in the List can be accessed by putting the index in square brackets |
| 85 | 173 after the List. Indexes are zero-based, thus the first item has index zero. > |
| 174 :let item = mylist[0] " get the first item: 1 | |
| 55 | 175 :let item = mylist[2] " get the third item: 3 |
| 85 | 176 |
| 87 | 177 When the resulting item is a list this can be repeated: > |
| 85 | 178 :let item = nestlist[0][1] " get the first list, second item: 12 |
| 55 | 179 < |
| 85 | 180 A negative index is counted from the end. Index -1 refers to the last item in |
| 181 the List, -2 to the last but one item, etc. > | |
| 55 | 182 :let last = mylist[-1] " get the last item: "four" |
| 183 | |
| 85 | 184 To avoid an error for an invalid index use the |get()| function. When an item |
| 87 | 185 is not available it returns zero or the default value you specify: > |
| 85 | 186 :echo get(mylist, idx) |
| 187 :echo get(mylist, idx, "NONE") | |
| 188 | |
| 189 | |
| 190 List concatenation ~ | |
| 191 | |
| 192 Two lists can be concatenated with the "+" operator: > | |
| 193 :let longlist = mylist + [5, 6] | |
| 119 | 194 :let mylist += [7, 8] |
| 85 | 195 |
| 196 To prepend or append an item turn the item into a list by putting [] around | |
| 197 it. To change a list in-place see |list-modification| below. | |
| 198 | |
| 199 | |
| 200 Sublist ~ | |
| 201 | |
| 55 | 202 A part of the List can be obtained by specifying the first and last index, |
| 203 separated by a colon in square brackets: > | |
| 85 | 204 :let shortlist = mylist[2:-1] " get List [3, "four"] |
| 55 | 205 |
| 206 Omitting the first index is similar to zero. Omitting the last index is | |
| 1156 | 207 similar to -1. > |
| 90 | 208 :let endlist = mylist[2:] " from item 2 to the end: [3, "four"] |
| 209 :let shortlist = mylist[2:2] " List with one item: [3] | |
| 210 :let otherlist = mylist[:] " make a copy of the List | |
| 85 | 211 |
| 842 | 212 If the first index is beyond the last item of the List or the second item is |
| 213 before the first item, the result is an empty list. There is no error | |
| 214 message. | |
| 215 | |
| 216 If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list the | |
| 217 length minus one is used: > | |
| 829 | 218 :let mylist = [0, 1, 2, 3] |
| 219 :echo mylist[2:8] " result: [2, 3] | |
| 220 | |
| 270 | 221 NOTE: mylist[s:e] means using the variable "s:e" as index. Watch out for |
| 1621 | 222 using a single letter variable before the ":". Insert a space when needed: |
| 270 | 223 mylist[s : e]. |
| 224 | |
| 85 | 225 |
| 226 List identity ~ | |
| 99 | 227 *list-identity* |
| 85 | 228 When variable "aa" is a list and you assign it to another variable "bb", both |
| 229 variables refer to the same list. Thus changing the list "aa" will also | |
| 230 change "bb": > | |
| 231 :let aa = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 232 :let bb = aa | |
| 233 :call add(aa, 4) | |
| 234 :echo bb | |
| 114 | 235 < [1, 2, 3, 4] |
| 85 | 236 |
| 237 Making a copy of a list is done with the |copy()| function. Using [:] also | |
| 238 works, as explained above. This creates a shallow copy of the list: Changing | |
| 87 | 239 a list item in the list will also change the item in the copied list: > |
| 85 | 240 :let aa = [[1, 'a'], 2, 3] |
| 241 :let bb = copy(aa) | |
| 114 | 242 :call add(aa, 4) |
| 85 | 243 :let aa[0][1] = 'aaa' |
| 244 :echo aa | |
| 114 | 245 < [[1, aaa], 2, 3, 4] > |
| 85 | 246 :echo bb |
| 114 | 247 < [[1, aaa], 2, 3] |
| 85 | 248 |
| 87 | 249 To make a completely independent list use |deepcopy()|. This also makes a |
| 114 | 250 copy of the values in the list, recursively. Up to a hundred levels deep. |
| 85 | 251 |
| 252 The operator "is" can be used to check if two variables refer to the same | |
| 114 | 253 List. "isnot" does the opposite. In contrast "==" compares if two lists have |
| 87 | 254 the same value. > |
| 255 :let alist = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 256 :let blist = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 257 :echo alist is blist | |
| 114 | 258 < 0 > |
| 87 | 259 :echo alist == blist |
| 114 | 260 < 1 |
| 85 | 261 |
| 323 | 262 Note about comparing lists: Two lists are considered equal if they have the |
| 263 same length and all items compare equal, as with using "==". There is one | |
| 388 | 264 exception: When comparing a number with a string they are considered |
| 265 different. There is no automatic type conversion, as with using "==" on | |
| 266 variables. Example: > | |
| 267 echo 4 == "4" | |
| 323 | 268 < 1 > |
| 388 | 269 echo [4] == ["4"] |
| 323 | 270 < 0 |
| 271 | |
| 388 | 272 Thus comparing Lists is more strict than comparing numbers and strings. You |
| 1621 | 273 can compare simple values this way too by putting them in a list: > |
| 388 | 274 |
| 275 :let a = 5 | |
| 276 :let b = "5" | |
| 1621 | 277 :echo a == b |
| 388 | 278 < 1 > |
| 1621 | 279 :echo [a] == [b] |
| 388 | 280 < 0 |
| 323 | 281 |
| 85 | 282 |
| 283 List unpack ~ | |
| 284 | |
| 285 To unpack the items in a list to individual variables, put the variables in | |
| 286 square brackets, like list items: > | |
| 287 :let [var1, var2] = mylist | |
| 288 | |
| 289 When the number of variables does not match the number of items in the list | |
| 290 this produces an error. To handle any extra items from the list append ";" | |
| 291 and a variable name: > | |
| 292 :let [var1, var2; rest] = mylist | |
| 293 | |
| 294 This works like: > | |
| 295 :let var1 = mylist[0] | |
| 296 :let var2 = mylist[1] | |
| 95 | 297 :let rest = mylist[2:] |
| 85 | 298 |
| 299 Except that there is no error if there are only two items. "rest" will be an | |
| 300 empty list then. | |
| 301 | |
| 302 | |
| 303 List modification ~ | |
| 304 *list-modification* | |
| 87 | 305 To change a specific item of a list use |:let| this way: > |
| 85 | 306 :let list[4] = "four" |
| 307 :let listlist[0][3] = item | |
| 308 | |
| 87 | 309 To change part of a list you can specify the first and last item to be |
| 114 | 310 modified. The value must at least have the number of items in the range: > |
| 87 | 311 :let list[3:5] = [3, 4, 5] |
| 312 | |
| 85 | 313 Adding and removing items from a list is done with functions. Here are a few |
| 314 examples: > | |
| 315 :call insert(list, 'a') " prepend item 'a' | |
| 316 :call insert(list, 'a', 3) " insert item 'a' before list[3] | |
| 317 :call add(list, "new") " append String item | |
| 114 | 318 :call add(list, [1, 2]) " append a List as one new item |
| 85 | 319 :call extend(list, [1, 2]) " extend the list with two more items |
| 320 :let i = remove(list, 3) " remove item 3 | |
| 108 | 321 :unlet list[3] " idem |
| 85 | 322 :let l = remove(list, 3, -1) " remove items 3 to last item |
| 108 | 323 :unlet list[3 : ] " idem |
| 114 | 324 :call filter(list, 'v:val !~ "x"') " remove items with an 'x' |
| 325 | |
| 326 Changing the order of items in a list: > | |
| 87 | 327 :call sort(list) " sort a list alphabetically |
| 328 :call reverse(list) " reverse the order of items | |
| 329 | |
| 85 | 330 |
| 331 For loop ~ | |
| 332 | |
| 87 | 333 The |:for| loop executes commands for each item in a list. A variable is set |
| 334 to each item in the list in sequence. Example: > | |
| 114 | 335 :for item in mylist |
| 336 : call Doit(item) | |
| 85 | 337 :endfor |
| 338 | |
| 339 This works like: > | |
| 340 :let index = 0 | |
| 341 :while index < len(mylist) | |
| 114 | 342 : let item = mylist[index] |
| 343 : :call Doit(item) | |
| 85 | 344 : let index = index + 1 |
| 345 :endwhile | |
| 346 | |
| 347 Note that all items in the list should be of the same type, otherwise this | |
| 114 | 348 results in error |E706|. To avoid this |:unlet| the variable at the end of |
| 87 | 349 the loop. |
| 85 | 350 |
| 95 | 351 If all you want to do is modify each item in the list then the |map()| |
| 114 | 352 function will be a simpler method than a for loop. |
| 95 | 353 |
| 1621 | 354 Just like the |:let| command, |:for| also accepts a list of variables. This |
| 85 | 355 requires the argument to be a list of lists. > |
| 356 :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 8], [3, 0]] | |
| 357 : call Doit(lnum, col) | |
| 358 :endfor | |
| 359 | |
| 360 This works like a |:let| command is done for each list item. Again, the types | |
| 361 must remain the same to avoid an error. | |
| 362 | |
| 114 | 363 It is also possible to put remaining items in a List variable: > |
| 85 | 364 :for [i, j; rest] in listlist |
| 365 : call Doit(i, j) | |
| 366 : if !empty(rest) | |
| 367 : echo "remainder: " . string(rest) | |
| 368 : endif | |
| 369 :endfor | |
| 370 | |
| 371 | |
| 372 List functions ~ | |
| 114 | 373 *E714* |
| 85 | 374 Functions that are useful with a List: > |
| 87 | 375 :let r = call(funcname, list) " call a function with an argument list |
| 85 | 376 :if empty(list) " check if list is empty |
| 102 | 377 :let l = len(list) " number of items in list |
| 378 :let big = max(list) " maximum value in list | |
| 379 :let small = min(list) " minimum value in list | |
| 87 | 380 :let xs = count(list, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in list |
| 381 :let i = index(list, 'x') " index of first 'x' in list | |
| 85 | 382 :let lines = getline(1, 10) " get ten text lines from buffer |
| 383 :call append('$', lines) " append text lines in buffer | |
| 95 | 384 :let list = split("a b c") " create list from items in a string |
| 385 :let string = join(list, ', ') " create string from list items | |
| 102 | 386 :let s = string(list) " String representation of list |
| 387 :call map(list, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item | |
| 99 | 388 |
| 258 | 389 Don't forget that a combination of features can make things simple. For |
| 390 example, to add up all the numbers in a list: > | |
| 391 :exe 'let sum = ' . join(nrlist, '+') | |
| 392 | |
| 99 | 393 |
| 394 1.4 Dictionaries ~ | |
| 114 | 395 *Dictionaries* *Dictionary* |
| 99 | 396 A Dictionary is an associative array: Each entry has a key and a value. The |
| 114 | 397 entry can be located with the key. The entries are stored without a specific |
| 398 ordering. | |
| 99 | 399 |
| 400 | |
| 401 Dictionary creation ~ | |
| 114 | 402 *E720* *E721* *E722* *E723* |
| 99 | 403 A Dictionary is created with a comma separated list of entries in curly |
| 114 | 404 braces. Each entry has a key and a value, separated by a colon. Each key can |
| 405 only appear once. Examples: > | |
| 99 | 406 :let mydict = {1: 'one', 2: 'two', 3: 'three'} |
| 407 :let emptydict = {} | |
| 114 | 408 < *E713* *E716* *E717* |
| 99 | 409 A key is always a String. You can use a Number, it will be converted to a |
| 410 String automatically. Thus the String '4' and the number 4 will find the same | |
| 1621 | 411 entry. Note that the String '04' and the Number 04 are different, since the |
| 114 | 412 Number will be converted to the String '4'. |
| 413 | |
| 1621 | 414 A value can be any expression. Using a Dictionary for a value creates a |
| 99 | 415 nested Dictionary: > |
| 416 :let nestdict = {1: {11: 'a', 12: 'b'}, 2: {21: 'c'}} | |
| 417 | |
| 418 An extra comma after the last entry is ignored. | |
| 419 | |
| 420 | |
| 421 Accessing entries ~ | |
| 422 | |
| 423 The normal way to access an entry is by putting the key in square brackets: > | |
| 424 :let val = mydict["one"] | |
| 425 :let mydict["four"] = 4 | |
| 426 | |
| 114 | 427 You can add new entries to an existing Dictionary this way, unlike Lists. |
| 99 | 428 |
| 429 For keys that consist entirely of letters, digits and underscore the following | |
| 430 form can be used |expr-entry|: > | |
| 431 :let val = mydict.one | |
| 432 :let mydict.four = 4 | |
| 433 | |
| 434 Since an entry can be any type, also a List and a Dictionary, the indexing and | |
| 435 key lookup can be repeated: > | |
| 114 | 436 :echo dict.key[idx].key |
| 99 | 437 |
| 438 | |
| 439 Dictionary to List conversion ~ | |
| 440 | |
| 1621 | 441 You may want to loop over the entries in a dictionary. For this you need to |
| 99 | 442 turn the Dictionary into a List and pass it to |:for|. |
| 443 | |
| 444 Most often you want to loop over the keys, using the |keys()| function: > | |
| 445 :for key in keys(mydict) | |
| 446 : echo key . ': ' . mydict[key] | |
| 447 :endfor | |
| 448 | |
| 449 The List of keys is unsorted. You may want to sort them first: > | |
| 450 :for key in sort(keys(mydict)) | |
| 451 | |
| 452 To loop over the values use the |values()| function: > | |
| 453 :for v in values(mydict) | |
| 454 : echo "value: " . v | |
| 455 :endfor | |
| 456 | |
| 457 If you want both the key and the value use the |items()| function. It returns | |
| 1621 | 458 a List in which each item is a List with two items, the key and the value: > |
| 1156 | 459 :for [key, value] in items(mydict) |
| 460 : echo key . ': ' . value | |
| 99 | 461 :endfor |
| 462 | |
| 463 | |
| 464 Dictionary identity ~ | |
| 161 | 465 *dict-identity* |
| 99 | 466 Just like Lists you need to use |copy()| and |deepcopy()| to make a copy of a |
| 467 Dictionary. Otherwise, assignment results in referring to the same | |
| 468 Dictionary: > | |
| 469 :let onedict = {'a': 1, 'b': 2} | |
| 470 :let adict = onedict | |
| 471 :let adict['a'] = 11 | |
| 472 :echo onedict['a'] | |
| 473 11 | |
| 474 | |
| 327 | 475 Two Dictionaries compare equal if all the key-value pairs compare equal. For |
| 476 more info see |list-identity|. | |
| 99 | 477 |
| 478 | |
| 479 Dictionary modification ~ | |
| 480 *dict-modification* | |
| 481 To change an already existing entry of a Dictionary, or to add a new entry, | |
| 482 use |:let| this way: > | |
| 483 :let dict[4] = "four" | |
| 484 :let dict['one'] = item | |
| 485 | |
| 108 | 486 Removing an entry from a Dictionary is done with |remove()| or |:unlet|. |
| 487 Three ways to remove the entry with key "aaa" from dict: > | |
| 488 :let i = remove(dict, 'aaa') | |
| 489 :unlet dict.aaa | |
| 490 :unlet dict['aaa'] | |
| 99 | 491 |
| 492 Merging a Dictionary with another is done with |extend()|: > | |
| 114 | 493 :call extend(adict, bdict) |
| 494 This extends adict with all entries from bdict. Duplicate keys cause entries | |
| 495 in adict to be overwritten. An optional third argument can change this. | |
| 119 | 496 Note that the order of entries in a Dictionary is irrelevant, thus don't |
| 497 expect ":echo adict" to show the items from bdict after the older entries in | |
| 498 adict. | |
| 99 | 499 |
| 500 Weeding out entries from a Dictionary can be done with |filter()|: > | |
| 1156 | 501 :call filter(dict, 'v:val =~ "x"') |
| 114 | 502 This removes all entries from "dict" with a value not matching 'x'. |
| 102 | 503 |
| 504 | |
| 505 Dictionary function ~ | |
| 114 | 506 *Dictionary-function* *self* *E725* |
| 102 | 507 When a function is defined with the "dict" attribute it can be used in a |
| 1621 | 508 special way with a dictionary. Example: > |
| 102 | 509 :function Mylen() dict |
| 114 | 510 : return len(self.data) |
| 102 | 511 :endfunction |
| 114 | 512 :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3], 'len': function("Mylen")} |
| 513 :echo mydict.len() | |
| 102 | 514 |
| 515 This is like a method in object oriented programming. The entry in the | |
| 516 Dictionary is a |Funcref|. The local variable "self" refers to the dictionary | |
| 517 the function was invoked from. | |
| 518 | |
| 114 | 519 It is also possible to add a function without the "dict" attribute as a |
| 520 Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then. | |
| 521 | |
| 819 | 522 *numbered-function* *anonymous-function* |
| 102 | 523 To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly |
| 524 assigned to a Dictionary in this way: > | |
| 114 | 525 :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]} |
| 526 :function mydict.len() dict | |
| 527 : return len(self.data) | |
| 102 | 528 :endfunction |
| 114 | 529 :echo mydict.len() |
| 530 | |
| 531 The function will then get a number and the value of dict.len is a |Funcref| | |
| 1621 | 532 that references this function. The function can only be used through a |
| 114 | 533 |Funcref|. It will automatically be deleted when there is no |Funcref| |
| 534 remaining that refers to it. | |
| 535 | |
| 536 It is not necessary to use the "dict" attribute for a numbered function. | |
| 102 | 537 |
|
2488
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
538 If you get an error for a numbered function, you can find out what it is with |
|
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
539 a trick. Assuming the function is 42, the command is: > |
|
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
540 :function {42} |
|
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
541 |
| 102 | 542 |
| 543 Functions for Dictionaries ~ | |
| 114 | 544 *E715* |
| 545 Functions that can be used with a Dictionary: > | |
| 102 | 546 :if has_key(dict, 'foo') " TRUE if dict has entry with key "foo" |
| 547 :if empty(dict) " TRUE if dict is empty | |
| 548 :let l = len(dict) " number of items in dict | |
| 549 :let big = max(dict) " maximum value in dict | |
| 550 :let small = min(dict) " minimum value in dict | |
| 551 :let xs = count(dict, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in dict | |
| 552 :let s = string(dict) " String representation of dict | |
| 553 :call map(dict, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item | |
| 99 | 554 |
| 555 | |
| 556 1.5 More about variables ~ | |
| 85 | 557 *more-variables* |
| 7 | 558 If you need to know the type of a variable or expression, use the |type()| |
| 559 function. | |
| 560 | |
| 561 When the '!' flag is included in the 'viminfo' option, global variables that | |
| 562 start with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase letter, are | |
| 563 stored in the viminfo file |viminfo-file|. | |
| 564 | |
| 565 When the 'sessionoptions' option contains "global", global variables that | |
| 566 start with an uppercase letter and contain at least one lowercase letter are | |
| 567 stored in the session file |session-file|. | |
| 568 | |
| 569 variable name can be stored where ~ | |
| 570 my_var_6 not | |
| 571 My_Var_6 session file | |
| 572 MY_VAR_6 viminfo file | |
| 573 | |
| 574 | |
| 575 It's possible to form a variable name with curly braces, see | |
| 576 |curly-braces-names|. | |
| 577 | |
| 578 ============================================================================== | |
| 579 2. Expression syntax *expression-syntax* | |
| 580 | |
| 581 Expression syntax summary, from least to most significant: | |
| 582 | |
| 583 |expr1| expr2 ? expr1 : expr1 if-then-else | |
| 584 | |
| 585 |expr2| expr3 || expr3 .. logical OR | |
| 586 | |
| 587 |expr3| expr4 && expr4 .. logical AND | |
| 588 | |
| 589 |expr4| expr5 == expr5 equal | |
| 590 expr5 != expr5 not equal | |
| 591 expr5 > expr5 greater than | |
| 592 expr5 >= expr5 greater than or equal | |
| 593 expr5 < expr5 smaller than | |
| 594 expr5 <= expr5 smaller than or equal | |
| 595 expr5 =~ expr5 regexp matches | |
| 596 expr5 !~ expr5 regexp doesn't match | |
| 597 | |
| 598 expr5 ==? expr5 equal, ignoring case | |
| 599 expr5 ==# expr5 equal, match case | |
| 600 etc. As above, append ? for ignoring case, # for | |
| 601 matching case | |
| 602 | |
| 685 | 603 expr5 is expr5 same |List| instance |
| 604 expr5 isnot expr5 different |List| instance | |
| 79 | 605 |
| 606 |expr5| expr6 + expr6 .. number addition or list concatenation | |
| 7 | 607 expr6 - expr6 .. number subtraction |
| 608 expr6 . expr6 .. string concatenation | |
| 609 | |
| 610 |expr6| expr7 * expr7 .. number multiplication | |
| 611 expr7 / expr7 .. number division | |
| 612 expr7 % expr7 .. number modulo | |
| 613 | |
| 614 |expr7| ! expr7 logical NOT | |
| 615 - expr7 unary minus | |
| 616 + expr7 unary plus | |
| 102 | 617 |
| 685 | 618 |expr8| expr8[expr1] byte of a String or item of a |List| |
| 619 expr8[expr1 : expr1] substring of a String or sublist of a |List| | |
| 620 expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary| | |
| 621 expr8(expr1, ...) function call with |Funcref| variable | |
| 102 | 622 |
| 623 |expr9| number number constant | |
| 26 | 624 "string" string constant, backslash is special |
| 99 | 625 'string' string constant, ' is doubled |
| 685 | 626 [expr1, ...] |List| |
| 627 {expr1: expr1, ...} |Dictionary| | |
| 7 | 628 &option option value |
| 629 (expr1) nested expression | |
| 630 variable internal variable | |
| 631 va{ria}ble internal variable with curly braces | |
| 632 $VAR environment variable | |
| 633 @r contents of register 'r' | |
| 634 function(expr1, ...) function call | |
| 635 func{ti}on(expr1, ...) function call with curly braces | |
| 636 | |
| 637 | |
| 638 ".." indicates that the operations in this level can be concatenated. | |
| 639 Example: > | |
| 640 &nu || &list && &shell == "csh" | |
| 641 | |
| 642 All expressions within one level are parsed from left to right. | |
| 643 | |
| 644 | |
| 645 expr1 *expr1* *E109* | |
| 646 ----- | |
| 647 | |
| 648 expr2 ? expr1 : expr1 | |
| 649 | |
| 650 The expression before the '?' is evaluated to a number. If it evaluates to | |
| 651 non-zero, the result is the value of the expression between the '?' and ':', | |
| 652 otherwise the result is the value of the expression after the ':'. | |
| 653 Example: > | |
| 654 :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum | |
| 655 | |
| 656 Since the first expression is an "expr2", it cannot contain another ?:. The | |
| 657 other two expressions can, thus allow for recursive use of ?:. | |
| 658 Example: > | |
| 659 :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum == 1000 ? "last" : lnum | |
| 660 | |
| 661 To keep this readable, using |line-continuation| is suggested: > | |
| 662 :echo lnum == 1 | |
| 663 :\ ? "top" | |
| 664 :\ : lnum == 1000 | |
| 665 :\ ? "last" | |
| 666 :\ : lnum | |
| 667 | |
| 1156 | 668 You should always put a space before the ':', otherwise it can be mistaken for |
| 669 use in a variable such as "a:1". | |
| 670 | |
| 7 | 671 |
| 672 expr2 and expr3 *expr2* *expr3* | |
| 673 --------------- | |
| 674 | |
| 675 *expr-barbar* *expr-&&* | |
| 676 The "||" and "&&" operators take one argument on each side. The arguments | |
| 677 are (converted to) Numbers. The result is: | |
| 678 | |
| 679 input output ~ | |
| 680 n1 n2 n1 || n2 n1 && n2 ~ | |
| 681 zero zero zero zero | |
| 682 zero non-zero non-zero zero | |
| 683 non-zero zero non-zero zero | |
| 684 non-zero non-zero non-zero non-zero | |
| 685 | |
| 686 The operators can be concatenated, for example: > | |
| 687 | |
| 688 &nu || &list && &shell == "csh" | |
| 689 | |
| 690 Note that "&&" takes precedence over "||", so this has the meaning of: > | |
| 691 | |
| 692 &nu || (&list && &shell == "csh") | |
| 693 | |
| 694 Once the result is known, the expression "short-circuits", that is, further | |
| 695 arguments are not evaluated. This is like what happens in C. For example: > | |
| 696 | |
| 697 let a = 1 | |
| 698 echo a || b | |
| 699 | |
| 700 This is valid even if there is no variable called "b" because "a" is non-zero, | |
| 701 so the result must be non-zero. Similarly below: > | |
| 702 | |
| 703 echo exists("b") && b == "yes" | |
| 704 | |
| 705 This is valid whether "b" has been defined or not. The second clause will | |
| 706 only be evaluated if "b" has been defined. | |
| 707 | |
| 708 | |
| 709 expr4 *expr4* | |
| 710 ----- | |
| 711 | |
| 712 expr5 {cmp} expr5 | |
| 713 | |
| 714 Compare two expr5 expressions, resulting in a 0 if it evaluates to false, or 1 | |
| 715 if it evaluates to true. | |
| 716 | |
| 1621 | 717 *expr-==* *expr-!=* *expr->* *expr->=* |
| 7 | 718 *expr-<* *expr-<=* *expr-=~* *expr-!~* |
| 719 *expr-==#* *expr-!=#* *expr->#* *expr->=#* | |
| 720 *expr-<#* *expr-<=#* *expr-=~#* *expr-!~#* | |
| 721 *expr-==?* *expr-!=?* *expr->?* *expr->=?* | |
| 722 *expr-<?* *expr-<=?* *expr-=~?* *expr-!~?* | |
| 2908 | 723 *expr-is* *expr-isnot* *expr-is#* *expr-isnot#* |
| 724 *expr-is?* *expr-isnot?* | |
| 7 | 725 use 'ignorecase' match case ignore case ~ |
| 726 equal == ==# ==? | |
| 727 not equal != !=# !=? | |
| 728 greater than > ># >? | |
| 729 greater than or equal >= >=# >=? | |
| 730 smaller than < <# <? | |
| 731 smaller than or equal <= <=# <=? | |
| 732 regexp matches =~ =~# =~? | |
| 733 regexp doesn't match !~ !~# !~? | |
| 2908 | 734 same instance is is# is? |
| 735 different instance isnot isnot# isnot? | |
| 7 | 736 |
| 737 Examples: | |
| 738 "abc" ==# "Abc" evaluates to 0 | |
| 739 "abc" ==? "Abc" evaluates to 1 | |
| 740 "abc" == "Abc" evaluates to 1 if 'ignorecase' is set, 0 otherwise | |
| 741 | |
| 85 | 742 *E691* *E692* |
| 685 | 743 A |List| can only be compared with a |List| and only "equal", "not equal" and |
| 744 "is" can be used. This compares the values of the list, recursively. | |
| 745 Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values. | |
| 79 | 746 |
| 114 | 747 *E735* *E736* |
| 685 | 748 A |Dictionary| can only be compared with a |Dictionary| and only "equal", "not |
| 749 equal" and "is" can be used. This compares the key/values of the |Dictionary| | |
| 114 | 750 recursively. Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values. |
| 751 | |
| 85 | 752 *E693* *E694* |
| 685 | 753 A |Funcref| can only be compared with a |Funcref| and only "equal" and "not |
| 754 equal" can be used. Case is never ignored. | |
| 755 | |
| 2908 | 756 When using "is" or "isnot" with a |List| or a |Dictionary| this checks if the |
| 757 expressions are referring to the same |List| or |Dictionary| instance. A copy | |
| 758 of a |List| is different from the original |List|. When using "is" without | |
| 759 a |List| or a |Dictionary| it is equivalent to using "equal", using "isnot" | |
| 760 equivalent to using "not equal". Except that a different type means the | |
| 761 values are different: "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'" is false and "0 is []" is | |
| 762 false and not a error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match | |
| 763 and ignore case. | |
| 79 | 764 |
| 7 | 765 When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number, |
| 1621 | 766 and the comparison is done on Numbers. This means that "0 == 'x'" is TRUE, |
| 7 | 767 because 'x' converted to a Number is zero. |
| 768 | |
| 769 When comparing two Strings, this is done with strcmp() or stricmp(). This | |
| 770 results in the mathematical difference (comparing byte values), not | |
| 771 necessarily the alphabetical difference in the local language. | |
| 772 | |
| 1621 | 773 When using the operators with a trailing '#', or the short version and |
| 1156 | 774 'ignorecase' is off, the comparing is done with strcmp(): case matters. |
| 7 | 775 |
| 776 When using the operators with a trailing '?', or the short version and | |
| 1156 | 777 'ignorecase' is set, the comparing is done with stricmp(): case is ignored. |
| 778 | |
| 779 'smartcase' is not used. | |
| 7 | 780 |
| 781 The "=~" and "!~" operators match the lefthand argument with the righthand | |
| 782 argument, which is used as a pattern. See |pattern| for what a pattern is. | |
| 783 This matching is always done like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no | |
| 784 matter what the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is. This makes scripts | |
| 785 portable. To avoid backslashes in the regexp pattern to be doubled, use a | |
| 786 single-quote string, see |literal-string|. | |
| 787 Since a string is considered to be a single line, a multi-line pattern | |
| 788 (containing \n, backslash-n) will not match. However, a literal NL character | |
| 789 can be matched like an ordinary character. Examples: | |
| 790 "foo\nbar" =~ "\n" evaluates to 1 | |
| 791 "foo\nbar" =~ "\\n" evaluates to 0 | |
| 792 | |
| 793 | |
| 794 expr5 and expr6 *expr5* *expr6* | |
| 795 --------------- | |
| 685 | 796 expr6 + expr6 .. Number addition or |List| concatenation *expr-+* |
| 79 | 797 expr6 - expr6 .. Number subtraction *expr--* |
| 798 expr6 . expr6 .. String concatenation *expr-.* | |
| 799 | |
| 692 | 800 For |Lists| only "+" is possible and then both expr6 must be a list. The |
| 685 | 801 result is a new list with the two lists Concatenated. |
| 79 | 802 |
| 3214 | 803 expr7 * expr7 .. Number multiplication *expr-star* |
| 804 expr7 / expr7 .. Number division *expr-/* | |
| 805 expr7 % expr7 .. Number modulo *expr-%* | |
| 7 | 806 |
| 807 For all, except ".", Strings are converted to Numbers. | |
| 3214 | 808 For bitwise operators see |and()|, |or()| and |xor()|. |
| 7 | 809 |
| 810 Note the difference between "+" and ".": | |
| 811 "123" + "456" = 579 | |
| 812 "123" . "456" = "123456" | |
| 813 | |
| 1621 | 814 Since '.' has the same precedence as '+' and '-', you need to read: > |
| 815 1 . 90 + 90.0 | |
| 816 As: > | |
| 817 (1 . 90) + 90.0 | |
| 818 That works, since the String "190" is automatically converted to the Number | |
| 819 190, which can be added to the Float 90.0. However: > | |
| 820 1 . 90 * 90.0 | |
| 821 Should be read as: > | |
| 822 1 . (90 * 90.0) | |
| 823 Since '.' has lower precedence than '*'. This does NOT work, since this | |
| 824 attempts to concatenate a Float and a String. | |
| 825 | |
| 826 When dividing a Number by zero the result depends on the value: | |
| 827 0 / 0 = -0x80000000 (like NaN for Float) | |
| 828 >0 / 0 = 0x7fffffff (like positive infinity) | |
| 829 <0 / 0 = -0x7fffffff (like negative infinity) | |
| 830 (before Vim 7.2 it was always 0x7fffffff) | |
| 831 | |
| 7 | 832 When the righthand side of '%' is zero, the result is 0. |
| 833 | |
| 685 | 834 None of these work for |Funcref|s. |
| 79 | 835 |
| 1621 | 836 . and % do not work for Float. *E804* |
| 837 | |
| 7 | 838 |
| 839 expr7 *expr7* | |
| 840 ----- | |
| 841 ! expr7 logical NOT *expr-!* | |
| 842 - expr7 unary minus *expr-unary--* | |
| 843 + expr7 unary plus *expr-unary-+* | |
| 844 | |
| 845 For '!' non-zero becomes zero, zero becomes one. | |
| 846 For '-' the sign of the number is changed. | |
| 847 For '+' the number is unchanged. | |
| 848 | |
| 849 A String will be converted to a Number first. | |
| 850 | |
| 1621 | 851 These three can be repeated and mixed. Examples: |
| 7 | 852 !-1 == 0 |
| 853 !!8 == 1 | |
| 854 --9 == 9 | |
| 855 | |
| 856 | |
| 857 expr8 *expr8* | |
| 858 ----- | |
| 685 | 859 expr8[expr1] item of String or |List| *expr-[]* *E111* |
| 102 | 860 |
| 861 If expr8 is a Number or String this results in a String that contains the | |
| 862 expr1'th single byte from expr8. expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
863 Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |byteidx()| for |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
864 an alternative. |
| 55 | 865 |
| 866 Index zero gives the first character. This is like it works in C. Careful: | |
| 867 text column numbers start with one! Example, to get the character under the | |
| 868 cursor: > | |
| 823 | 869 :let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] |
| 7 | 870 |
| 871 If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty | |
| 55 | 872 String. A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backwards |
| 873 compatibility). Use [-1:] to get the last byte. | |
| 874 | |
| 685 | 875 If expr8 is a |List| then it results the item at index expr1. See |list-index| |
| 55 | 876 for possible index values. If the index is out of range this results in an |
| 1621 | 877 error. Example: > |
| 55 | 878 :let item = mylist[-1] " get last item |
| 879 | |
| 685 | 880 Generally, if a |List| index is equal to or higher than the length of the |
| 881 |List|, or more negative than the length of the |List|, this results in an | |
| 882 error. | |
| 55 | 883 |
| 99 | 884 |
| 102 | 885 expr8[expr1a : expr1b] substring or sublist *expr-[:]* |
| 886 | |
| 887 If expr8 is a Number or String this results in the substring with the bytes | |
| 888 from expr1a to and including expr1b. expr8 is used as a String, expr1a and | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
889 expr1b are used as a Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
890 |byteidx()| for computing the indexes. |
| 55 | 891 |
| 892 If expr1a is omitted zero is used. If expr1b is omitted the length of the | |
| 893 string minus one is used. | |
| 894 | |
| 895 A negative number can be used to measure from the end of the string. -1 is | |
| 896 the last character, -2 the last but one, etc. | |
| 897 | |
| 898 If an index goes out of range for the string characters are omitted. If | |
| 899 expr1b is smaller than expr1a the result is an empty string. | |
| 900 | |
| 901 Examples: > | |
| 902 :let c = name[-1:] " last byte of a string | |
| 903 :let c = name[-2:-2] " last but one byte of a string | |
| 904 :let s = line(".")[4:] " from the fifth byte to the end | |
| 905 :let s = s[:-3] " remove last two bytes | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
906 < |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
907 *sublist* *slice* |
| 685 | 908 If expr8 is a |List| this results in a new |List| with the items indicated by |
| 1621 | 909 the indexes expr1a and expr1b. This works like with a String, as explained |
| 685 | 910 just above, except that indexes out of range cause an error. Examples: > |
| 55 | 911 :let l = mylist[:3] " first four items |
| 912 :let l = mylist[4:4] " List with one item | |
| 913 :let l = mylist[:] " shallow copy of a List | |
| 914 | |
| 685 | 915 Using expr8[expr1] or expr8[expr1a : expr1b] on a |Funcref| results in an |
| 916 error. | |
| 917 | |
| 918 | |
| 919 expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary| *expr-entry* | |
| 920 | |
| 921 If expr8 is a |Dictionary| and it is followed by a dot, then the following | |
| 922 name will be used as a key in the |Dictionary|. This is just like: | |
| 923 expr8[name]. | |
| 99 | 924 |
| 925 The name must consist of alphanumeric characters, just like a variable name, | |
| 926 but it may start with a number. Curly braces cannot be used. | |
| 927 | |
| 928 There must not be white space before or after the dot. | |
| 929 | |
| 930 Examples: > | |
| 931 :let dict = {"one": 1, 2: "two"} | |
| 932 :echo dict.one | |
| 933 :echo dict .2 | |
| 934 | |
| 935 Note that the dot is also used for String concatenation. To avoid confusion | |
| 936 always put spaces around the dot for String concatenation. | |
| 937 | |
| 938 | |
| 685 | 939 expr8(expr1, ...) |Funcref| function call |
| 102 | 940 |
| 941 When expr8 is a |Funcref| type variable, invoke the function it refers to. | |
| 942 | |
| 943 | |
| 944 | |
| 945 *expr9* | |
| 7 | 946 number |
| 947 ------ | |
| 3224 | 948 number number constant *expr-number* |
| 949 *hex-number* *octal-number* | |
| 7 | 950 |
| 951 Decimal, Hexadecimal (starting with 0x or 0X), or Octal (starting with 0). | |
| 952 | |
| 1621 | 953 *floating-point-format* |
| 954 Floating point numbers can be written in two forms: | |
| 955 | |
| 956 [-+]{N}.{M} | |
| 957 [-+]{N}.{M}e[-+]{exp} | |
| 958 | |
| 959 {N} and {M} are numbers. Both {N} and {M} must be present and can only | |
| 960 contain digits. | |
| 961 [-+] means there is an optional plus or minus sign. | |
| 962 {exp} is the exponent, power of 10. | |
| 963 Only a decimal point is accepted, not a comma. No matter what the current | |
| 964 locale is. | |
| 965 {only when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 966 | |
| 967 Examples: | |
| 968 123.456 | |
| 969 +0.0001 | |
| 970 55.0 | |
| 971 -0.123 | |
| 972 1.234e03 | |
| 973 1.0E-6 | |
| 974 -3.1416e+88 | |
| 975 | |
| 976 These are INVALID: | |
| 977 3. empty {M} | |
| 978 1e40 missing .{M} | |
| 979 | |
| 1698 | 980 *float-pi* *float-e* |
| 981 A few useful values to copy&paste: > | |
| 982 :let pi = 3.14159265359 | |
| 983 :let e = 2.71828182846 | |
| 984 | |
| 1621 | 985 Rationale: |
| 986 Before floating point was introduced, the text "123.456" was interpreted as | |
| 987 the two numbers "123" and "456", both converted to a string and concatenated, | |
| 988 resulting in the string "123456". Since this was considered pointless, and we | |
| 1698 | 989 could not find it intentionally being used in Vim scripts, this backwards |
| 1621 | 990 incompatibility was accepted in favor of being able to use the normal notation |
| 991 for floating point numbers. | |
| 992 | |
| 993 *floating-point-precision* | |
| 994 The precision and range of floating points numbers depends on what "double" | |
| 995 means in the library Vim was compiled with. There is no way to change this at | |
| 996 runtime. | |
| 997 | |
| 998 The default for displaying a |Float| is to use 6 decimal places, like using | |
| 999 printf("%g", f). You can select something else when using the |printf()| | |
| 1000 function. Example: > | |
| 1001 :echo printf('%.15e', atan(1)) | |
| 1002 < 7.853981633974483e-01 | |
| 1003 | |
| 1004 | |
| 7 | 1005 |
| 1006 string *expr-string* *E114* | |
| 1007 ------ | |
| 1008 "string" string constant *expr-quote* | |
| 1009 | |
| 1010 Note that double quotes are used. | |
| 1011 | |
| 1012 A string constant accepts these special characters: | |
| 1013 \... three-digit octal number (e.g., "\316") | |
| 1014 \.. two-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit) | |
| 1015 \. one-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit) | |
| 1016 \x.. byte specified with two hex numbers (e.g., "\x1f") | |
| 1017 \x. byte specified with one hex number (must be followed by non-hex char) | |
| 1018 \X.. same as \x.. | |
| 1019 \X. same as \x. | |
| 1621 | 1020 \u.... character specified with up to 4 hex numbers, stored according to the |
| 7 | 1021 current value of 'encoding' (e.g., "\u02a4") |
| 1022 \U.... same as \u.... | |
| 1023 \b backspace <BS> | |
| 1024 \e escape <Esc> | |
| 1025 \f formfeed <FF> | |
| 1026 \n newline <NL> | |
| 1027 \r return <CR> | |
| 1028 \t tab <Tab> | |
| 1029 \\ backslash | |
| 1030 \" double quote | |
| 2152 | 1031 \<xxx> Special key named "xxx". e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W. This is for use |
| 1032 in mappings, the 0x80 byte is escaped. Don't use <Char-xxxx> to get a | |
| 1033 utf-8 character, use \uxxxx as mentioned above. | |
| 7 | 1034 |
| 1156 | 1035 Note that "\xff" is stored as the byte 255, which may be invalid in some |
| 1036 encodings. Use "\u00ff" to store character 255 according to the current value | |
| 1037 of 'encoding'. | |
| 1038 | |
| 7 | 1039 Note that "\000" and "\x00" force the end of the string. |
| 1040 | |
| 1041 | |
| 1042 literal-string *literal-string* *E115* | |
| 1043 --------------- | |
| 26 | 1044 'string' string constant *expr-'* |
| 7 | 1045 |
| 1046 Note that single quotes are used. | |
| 1047 | |
| 1621 | 1048 This string is taken as it is. No backslashes are removed or have a special |
| 99 | 1049 meaning. The only exception is that two quotes stand for one quote. |
| 26 | 1050 |
| 1051 Single quoted strings are useful for patterns, so that backslashes do not need | |
| 1621 | 1052 to be doubled. These two commands are equivalent: > |
| 26 | 1053 if a =~ "\\s*" |
| 1054 if a =~ '\s*' | |
| 7 | 1055 |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 option *expr-option* *E112* *E113* | |
| 1058 ------ | |
| 1059 &option option value, local value if possible | |
| 1060 &g:option global option value | |
| 1061 &l:option local option value | |
| 1062 | |
| 1063 Examples: > | |
| 1064 echo "tabstop is " . &tabstop | |
| 1065 if &insertmode | |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 Any option name can be used here. See |options|. When using the local value | |
| 1068 and there is no buffer-local or window-local value, the global value is used | |
| 1069 anyway. | |
| 1070 | |
| 1071 | |
| 1156 | 1072 register *expr-register* *@r* |
| 7 | 1073 -------- |
| 1074 @r contents of register 'r' | |
| 1075 | |
| 1076 The result is the contents of the named register, as a single string. | |
| 1077 Newlines are inserted where required. To get the contents of the unnamed | |
| 1621 | 1078 register use @" or @@. See |registers| for an explanation of the available |
| 336 | 1079 registers. |
| 1080 | |
| 1081 When using the '=' register you get the expression itself, not what it | |
| 1082 evaluates to. Use |eval()| to evaluate it. | |
| 7 | 1083 |
| 1084 | |
| 1085 nesting *expr-nesting* *E110* | |
| 1086 ------- | |
| 1087 (expr1) nested expression | |
| 1088 | |
| 1089 | |
| 1090 environment variable *expr-env* | |
| 1091 -------------------- | |
| 1092 $VAR environment variable | |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 The String value of any environment variable. When it is not defined, the | |
| 1095 result is an empty string. | |
| 1096 *expr-env-expand* | |
| 1097 Note that there is a difference between using $VAR directly and using | |
| 1098 expand("$VAR"). Using it directly will only expand environment variables that | |
| 1099 are known inside the current Vim session. Using expand() will first try using | |
| 1100 the environment variables known inside the current Vim session. If that | |
| 1101 fails, a shell will be used to expand the variable. This can be slow, but it | |
| 1102 does expand all variables that the shell knows about. Example: > | |
| 1103 :echo $version | |
| 1104 :echo expand("$version") | |
| 1105 The first one probably doesn't echo anything, the second echoes the $version | |
| 1106 variable (if your shell supports it). | |
| 1107 | |
| 1108 | |
| 1109 internal variable *expr-variable* | |
| 1110 ----------------- | |
| 1111 variable internal variable | |
| 1112 See below |internal-variables|. | |
| 1113 | |
| 1114 | |
| 170 | 1115 function call *expr-function* *E116* *E118* *E119* *E120* |
| 7 | 1116 ------------- |
| 1117 function(expr1, ...) function call | |
| 1118 See below |functions|. | |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 | |
| 1121 ============================================================================== | |
| 2596 | 1122 3. Internal variable *internal-variables* *E461* |
| 1123 | |
| 7 | 1124 An internal variable name can be made up of letters, digits and '_'. But it |
| 1125 cannot start with a digit. It's also possible to use curly braces, see | |
| 1126 |curly-braces-names|. | |
| 1127 | |
| 1128 An internal variable is created with the ":let" command |:let|. | |
| 87 | 1129 An internal variable is explicitly destroyed with the ":unlet" command |
| 1130 |:unlet|. | |
| 1131 Using a name that is not an internal variable or refers to a variable that has | |
| 1132 been destroyed results in an error. | |
| 7 | 1133 |
| 1134 There are several name spaces for variables. Which one is to be used is | |
| 1135 specified by what is prepended: | |
| 1136 | |
| 1137 (nothing) In a function: local to a function; otherwise: global | |
| 1138 |buffer-variable| b: Local to the current buffer. | |
| 1139 |window-variable| w: Local to the current window. | |
| 819 | 1140 |tabpage-variable| t: Local to the current tab page. |
| 7 | 1141 |global-variable| g: Global. |
| 1142 |local-variable| l: Local to a function. | |
| 1143 |script-variable| s: Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script. | |
| 1144 |function-argument| a: Function argument (only inside a function). | |
| 1621 | 1145 |vim-variable| v: Global, predefined by Vim. |
| 7 | 1146 |
| 685 | 1147 The scope name by itself can be used as a |Dictionary|. For example, to |
| 1148 delete all script-local variables: > | |
| 133 | 1149 :for k in keys(s:) |
| 1150 : unlet s:[k] | |
| 1151 :endfor | |
| 1152 < | |
| 7 | 1153 *buffer-variable* *b:var* |
| 1154 A variable name that is preceded with "b:" is local to the current buffer. | |
| 1155 Thus you can have several "b:foo" variables, one for each buffer. | |
| 1156 This kind of variable is deleted when the buffer is wiped out or deleted with | |
| 1157 |:bdelete|. | |
| 1158 | |
| 1159 One local buffer variable is predefined: | |
| 1160 *b:changedtick-variable* *changetick* | |
| 1161 b:changedtick The total number of changes to the current buffer. It is | |
| 1162 incremented for each change. An undo command is also a change | |
| 1163 in this case. This can be used to perform an action only when | |
| 1164 the buffer has changed. Example: > | |
| 1165 :if my_changedtick != b:changedtick | |
| 1621 | 1166 : let my_changedtick = b:changedtick |
| 1167 : call My_Update() | |
| 7 | 1168 :endif |
| 1169 < | |
| 1170 *window-variable* *w:var* | |
| 1171 A variable name that is preceded with "w:" is local to the current window. It | |
| 1172 is deleted when the window is closed. | |
| 1173 | |
| 819 | 1174 *tabpage-variable* *t:var* |
| 1175 A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page, | |
| 1176 It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
1177 without the |+windows| feature} |
| 819 | 1178 |
| 7 | 1179 *global-variable* *g:var* |
| 1180 Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:". Omitting this will | |
| 1621 | 1181 access a variable local to a function. But "g:" can also be used in any other |
| 7 | 1182 place if you like. |
| 1183 | |
| 1184 *local-variable* *l:var* | |
| 1185 Inside functions local variables are accessed without prepending anything. | |
| 1156 | 1186 But you can also prepend "l:" if you like. However, without prepending "l:" |
| 1187 you may run into reserved variable names. For example "count". By itself it | |
| 1188 refers to "v:count". Using "l:count" you can have a local variable with the | |
| 1189 same name. | |
| 7 | 1190 |
| 1191 *script-variable* *s:var* | |
| 1192 In a Vim script variables starting with "s:" can be used. They cannot be | |
| 1193 accessed from outside of the scripts, thus are local to the script. | |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 They can be used in: | |
| 1196 - commands executed while the script is sourced | |
| 1197 - functions defined in the script | |
| 1198 - autocommands defined in the script | |
| 1199 - functions and autocommands defined in functions and autocommands which were | |
| 1200 defined in the script (recursively) | |
| 1201 - user defined commands defined in the script | |
| 1202 Thus not in: | |
| 1203 - other scripts sourced from this one | |
| 1204 - mappings | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1205 - menus |
| 7 | 1206 - etc. |
| 1207 | |
| 1156 | 1208 Script variables can be used to avoid conflicts with global variable names. |
| 1209 Take this example: > | |
| 7 | 1210 |
| 1211 let s:counter = 0 | |
| 1212 function MyCounter() | |
| 1213 let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | |
| 1214 echo s:counter | |
| 1215 endfunction | |
| 1216 command Tick call MyCounter() | |
| 1217 | |
| 1218 You can now invoke "Tick" from any script, and the "s:counter" variable in | |
| 1219 that script will not be changed, only the "s:counter" in the script where | |
| 1220 "Tick" was defined is used. | |
| 1221 | |
| 1222 Another example that does the same: > | |
| 1223 | |
| 1224 let s:counter = 0 | |
| 1225 command Tick let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | echo s:counter | |
| 1226 | |
| 1227 When calling a function and invoking a user-defined command, the context for | |
| 9 | 1228 script variables is set to the script where the function or command was |
| 7 | 1229 defined. |
| 1230 | |
| 1231 The script variables are also available when a function is defined inside a | |
| 1232 function that is defined in a script. Example: > | |
| 1233 | |
| 1234 let s:counter = 0 | |
| 1235 function StartCounting(incr) | |
| 1236 if a:incr | |
| 1237 function MyCounter() | |
| 1238 let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | |
| 1239 endfunction | |
| 1240 else | |
| 1241 function MyCounter() | |
| 1242 let s:counter = s:counter - 1 | |
| 1243 endfunction | |
| 1244 endif | |
| 1245 endfunction | |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 This defines the MyCounter() function either for counting up or counting down | |
| 1248 when calling StartCounting(). It doesn't matter from where StartCounting() is | |
| 1249 called, the s:counter variable will be accessible in MyCounter(). | |
| 1250 | |
| 1251 When the same script is sourced again it will use the same script variables. | |
| 1252 They will remain valid as long as Vim is running. This can be used to | |
| 1253 maintain a counter: > | |
| 1254 | |
| 1255 if !exists("s:counter") | |
| 1256 let s:counter = 1 | |
| 1257 echo "script executed for the first time" | |
| 1258 else | |
| 1259 let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | |
| 1260 echo "script executed " . s:counter . " times now" | |
| 1261 endif | |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 Note that this means that filetype plugins don't get a different set of script | |
| 1264 variables for each buffer. Use local buffer variables instead |b:var|. | |
| 1265 | |
| 1266 | |
| 1267 Predefined Vim variables: *vim-variable* *v:var* | |
| 1268 | |
| 189 | 1269 *v:beval_col* *beval_col-variable* |
| 1270 v:beval_col The number of the column, over which the mouse pointer is. | |
| 1271 This is the byte index in the |v:beval_lnum| line. | |
| 1272 Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1273 | |
| 1274 *v:beval_bufnr* *beval_bufnr-variable* | |
| 1275 v:beval_bufnr The number of the buffer, over which the mouse pointer is. Only | |
| 1276 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1277 | |
| 1278 *v:beval_lnum* *beval_lnum-variable* | |
| 1279 v:beval_lnum The number of the line, over which the mouse pointer is. Only | |
| 1280 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1281 | |
| 1282 *v:beval_text* *beval_text-variable* | |
| 374 | 1283 v:beval_text The text under or after the mouse pointer. Usually a word as |
| 1284 it is useful for debugging a C program. 'iskeyword' applies, | |
| 1285 but a dot and "->" before the position is included. When on a | |
| 1286 ']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and | |
| 189 | 1287 word before it. When on a Visual area within one line the |
| 1288 highlighted text is used. | |
| 1289 Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 *v:beval_winnr* *beval_winnr-variable* | |
| 1292 v:beval_winnr The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only | |
| 2709 | 1293 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. The first |
| 1294 window has number zero (unlike most other places where a | |
| 1295 window gets a number). | |
| 189 | 1296 |
| 844 | 1297 *v:char* *char-variable* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1298 v:char Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed |
|
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2236
diff
changeset
|
1299 character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |:map-<expr>|. |
| 2908 | 1300 It is also used by the |InsertCharPre| event. |
| 844 | 1301 |
| 7 | 1302 *v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable* |
| 1303 v:charconvert_from | |
| 1304 The name of the character encoding of a file to be converted. | |
| 1305 Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option. | |
| 1306 | |
| 1307 *v:charconvert_to* *charconvert_to-variable* | |
| 1308 v:charconvert_to | |
| 1309 The name of the character encoding of a file after conversion. | |
| 1310 Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option. | |
| 1311 | |
| 1312 *v:cmdarg* *cmdarg-variable* | |
| 1313 v:cmdarg This variable is used for two purposes: | |
| 1314 1. The extra arguments given to a file read/write command. | |
| 1315 Currently these are "++enc=" and "++ff=". This variable is | |
| 1316 set before an autocommand event for a file read/write | |
| 1317 command is triggered. There is a leading space to make it | |
| 1318 possible to append this variable directly after the | |
| 1621 | 1319 read/write command. Note: The "+cmd" argument isn't |
| 7 | 1320 included here, because it will be executed anyway. |
| 1321 2. When printing a PostScript file with ":hardcopy" this is | |
| 1322 the argument for the ":hardcopy" command. This can be used | |
| 1323 in 'printexpr'. | |
| 1324 | |
| 1325 *v:cmdbang* *cmdbang-variable* | |
| 1326 v:cmdbang Set like v:cmdarg for a file read/write command. When a "!" | |
| 1327 was used the value is 1, otherwise it is 0. Note that this | |
| 1328 can only be used in autocommands. For user commands |<bang>| | |
| 1329 can be used. | |
| 1330 | |
| 1331 *v:count* *count-variable* | |
| 1332 v:count The count given for the last Normal mode command. Can be used | |
| 1621 | 1333 to get the count before a mapping. Read-only. Example: > |
| 7 | 1334 :map _x :<C-U>echo "the count is " . v:count<CR> |
| 1335 < Note: The <C-U> is required to remove the line range that you | |
| 1336 get when typing ':' after a count. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1337 When there are two counts, as in "3d2w", they are multiplied, |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1338 just like what happens in the command, "d6w" for the example. |
| 667 | 1339 Also used for evaluating the 'formatexpr' option. |
| 7 | 1340 "count" also works, for backwards compatibility. |
| 1341 | |
| 1342 *v:count1* *count1-variable* | |
| 1343 v:count1 Just like "v:count", but defaults to one when no count is | |
| 1344 used. | |
| 1345 | |
| 1346 *v:ctype* *ctype-variable* | |
| 1347 v:ctype The current locale setting for characters of the runtime | |
| 1348 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the | |
| 1349 current locale encoding. Technical: it's the value of | |
| 1350 LC_CTYPE. When not using a locale the value is "C". | |
| 1351 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language| | |
| 1352 command. | |
| 1353 See |multi-lang|. | |
| 1354 | |
| 1355 *v:dying* *dying-variable* | |
| 1621 | 1356 v:dying Normally zero. When a deadly signal is caught it's set to |
| 7 | 1357 one. When multiple signals are caught the number increases. |
| 1358 Can be used in an autocommand to check if Vim didn't | |
| 1359 terminate normally. {only works on Unix} | |
| 1360 Example: > | |
| 1361 :au VimLeave * if v:dying | echo "\nAAAAaaaarrrggghhhh!!!\n" | endif | |
|
2226
36a9ac99e1ca
Don't execute some autocommands when v:dying is 2 or more.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
1362 < Note: if another deadly signal is caught when v:dying is one, |
|
36a9ac99e1ca
Don't execute some autocommands when v:dying is 2 or more.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
1363 VimLeave autocommands will not be executed. |
|
36a9ac99e1ca
Don't execute some autocommands when v:dying is 2 or more.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
1364 |
| 7 | 1365 *v:errmsg* *errmsg-variable* |
| 1366 v:errmsg Last given error message. It's allowed to set this variable. | |
| 1367 Example: > | |
| 1368 :let v:errmsg = "" | |
| 1369 :silent! next | |
| 1370 :if v:errmsg != "" | |
| 1371 : ... handle error | |
| 1372 < "errmsg" also works, for backwards compatibility. | |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 *v:exception* *exception-variable* | |
| 1375 v:exception The value of the exception most recently caught and not | |
| 1376 finished. See also |v:throwpoint| and |throw-variables|. | |
| 1377 Example: > | |
| 1378 :try | |
| 1379 : throw "oops" | |
| 1380 :catch /.*/ | |
| 1381 : echo "caught" v:exception | |
| 1382 :endtry | |
| 1383 < Output: "caught oops". | |
| 1384 | |
| 179 | 1385 *v:fcs_reason* *fcs_reason-variable* |
| 1386 v:fcs_reason The reason why the |FileChangedShell| event was triggered. | |
| 1387 Can be used in an autocommand to decide what to do and/or what | |
| 1388 to set v:fcs_choice to. Possible values: | |
| 1389 deleted file no longer exists | |
| 1390 conflict file contents, mode or timestamp was | |
| 1391 changed and buffer is modified | |
| 1392 changed file contents has changed | |
| 1393 mode mode of file changed | |
| 1394 time only file timestamp changed | |
| 1395 | |
| 1396 *v:fcs_choice* *fcs_choice-variable* | |
| 1397 v:fcs_choice What should happen after a |FileChangedShell| event was | |
| 1398 triggered. Can be used in an autocommand to tell Vim what to | |
| 1399 do with the affected buffer: | |
| 1400 reload Reload the buffer (does not work if | |
| 1401 the file was deleted). | |
| 1402 ask Ask the user what to do, as if there | |
| 1403 was no autocommand. Except that when | |
| 1404 only the timestamp changed nothing | |
| 1405 will happen. | |
| 1406 <empty> Nothing, the autocommand should do | |
| 1407 everything that needs to be done. | |
| 1408 The default is empty. If another (invalid) value is used then | |
| 1409 Vim behaves like it is empty, there is no warning message. | |
| 1410 | |
| 7 | 1411 *v:fname_in* *fname_in-variable* |
| 579 | 1412 v:fname_in The name of the input file. Valid while evaluating: |
| 7 | 1413 option used for ~ |
| 1414 'charconvert' file to be converted | |
| 1415 'diffexpr' original file | |
| 1416 'patchexpr' original file | |
| 1417 'printexpr' file to be printed | |
| 593 | 1418 And set to the swap file name for |SwapExists|. |
| 7 | 1419 |
| 1420 *v:fname_out* *fname_out-variable* | |
| 1421 v:fname_out The name of the output file. Only valid while | |
| 1422 evaluating: | |
| 1423 option used for ~ | |
| 1424 'charconvert' resulting converted file (*) | |
| 1425 'diffexpr' output of diff | |
| 1426 'patchexpr' resulting patched file | |
| 1427 (*) When doing conversion for a write command (e.g., ":w | |
| 1621 | 1428 file") it will be equal to v:fname_in. When doing conversion |
| 7 | 1429 for a read command (e.g., ":e file") it will be a temporary |
| 1430 file and different from v:fname_in. | |
| 1431 | |
| 1432 *v:fname_new* *fname_new-variable* | |
| 1433 v:fname_new The name of the new version of the file. Only valid while | |
| 1434 evaluating 'diffexpr'. | |
| 1435 | |
| 1436 *v:fname_diff* *fname_diff-variable* | |
| 1437 v:fname_diff The name of the diff (patch) file. Only valid while | |
| 1438 evaluating 'patchexpr'. | |
| 1439 | |
| 1440 *v:folddashes* *folddashes-variable* | |
| 1441 v:folddashes Used for 'foldtext': dashes representing foldlevel of a closed | |
| 1442 fold. | |
| 29 | 1443 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1444 |
| 1445 *v:foldlevel* *foldlevel-variable* | |
| 1446 v:foldlevel Used for 'foldtext': foldlevel of closed fold. | |
| 29 | 1447 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1448 |
| 1449 *v:foldend* *foldend-variable* | |
| 1450 v:foldend Used for 'foldtext': last line of closed fold. | |
| 29 | 1451 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1452 |
| 1453 *v:foldstart* *foldstart-variable* | |
| 1454 v:foldstart Used for 'foldtext': first line of closed fold. | |
| 29 | 1455 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1456 |
| 11 | 1457 *v:insertmode* *insertmode-variable* |
| 1458 v:insertmode Used for the |InsertEnter| and |InsertChange| autocommand | |
| 1459 events. Values: | |
| 1460 i Insert mode | |
| 1461 r Replace mode | |
| 1462 v Virtual Replace mode | |
| 1463 | |
| 102 | 1464 *v:key* *key-variable* |
| 685 | 1465 v:key Key of the current item of a |Dictionary|. Only valid while |
| 102 | 1466 evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |filter()|. |
| 1467 Read-only. | |
| 1468 | |
| 7 | 1469 *v:lang* *lang-variable* |
| 1470 v:lang The current locale setting for messages of the runtime | |
| 1471 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the | |
| 1472 current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_MESSAGES. | |
| 1473 The value is system dependent. | |
| 1474 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language| | |
| 1475 command. | |
| 1476 It can be different from |v:ctype| when messages are desired | |
| 1477 in a different language than what is used for character | |
| 1478 encoding. See |multi-lang|. | |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 *v:lc_time* *lc_time-variable* | |
| 1481 v:lc_time The current locale setting for time messages of the runtime | |
| 1482 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the | |
| 1483 current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_TIME. | |
| 1484 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language| | |
| 1485 command. See |multi-lang|. | |
| 1486 | |
| 1487 *v:lnum* *lnum-variable* | |
|
2350
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1488 v:lnum Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr|, 'formatexpr' and |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1489 'indentexpr' expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel' |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1490 and 'guitabtooltip'. Only valid while one of these |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1491 expressions is being evaluated. Read-only when in the |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1492 |sandbox|. |
| 7 | 1493 |
| 1029 | 1494 *v:mouse_win* *mouse_win-variable* |
| 1495 v:mouse_win Window number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|. | |
| 1496 First window has number 1, like with |winnr()|. The value is | |
| 1497 zero when there was no mouse button click. | |
| 1498 | |
| 1499 *v:mouse_lnum* *mouse_lnum-variable* | |
| 1500 v:mouse_lnum Line number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|. | |
| 1501 This is the text line number, not the screen line number. The | |
| 1502 value is zero when there was no mouse button click. | |
| 1503 | |
| 1504 *v:mouse_col* *mouse_col-variable* | |
| 1505 v:mouse_col Column number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|. | |
| 1506 This is the screen column number, like with |virtcol()|. The | |
| 1507 value is zero when there was no mouse button click. | |
| 1508 | |
| 1733 | 1509 *v:oldfiles* *oldfiles-variable* |
| 1510 v:oldfiles List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on | |
| 1511 startup. These are the files that Vim remembers marks for. | |
| 1512 The length of the List is limited by the ' argument of the | |
| 1513 'viminfo' option (default is 100). | |
| 1514 Also see |:oldfiles| and |c_#<|. | |
| 1515 The List can be modified, but this has no effect on what is | |
| 1516 stored in the |viminfo| file later. If you use values other | |
| 1517 than String this will cause trouble. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
1518 {only when compiled with the |+viminfo| feature} |
| 1733 | 1519 |
| 1490 | 1520 *v:operator* *operator-variable* |
| 1521 v:operator The last operator given in Normal mode. This is a single | |
| 1522 character except for commands starting with <g> or <z>, | |
| 1523 in which case it is two characters. Best used alongside | |
| 1524 |v:prevcount| and |v:register|. Useful if you want to cancel | |
| 1525 Operator-pending mode and then use the operator, e.g.: > | |
| 1526 :omap O <Esc>:call MyMotion(v:operator)<CR> | |
| 1527 < The value remains set until another operator is entered, thus | |
| 1528 don't expect it to be empty. | |
| 1529 v:operator is not set for |:delete|, |:yank| or other Ex | |
| 1530 commands. | |
| 1531 Read-only. | |
| 1532 | |
| 7 | 1533 *v:prevcount* *prevcount-variable* |
| 1534 v:prevcount The count given for the last but one Normal mode command. | |
| 1535 This is the v:count value of the previous command. Useful if | |
| 1490 | 1536 you want to cancel Visual or Operator-pending mode and then |
| 1537 use the count, e.g.: > | |
| 7 | 1538 :vmap % <Esc>:call MyFilter(v:prevcount)<CR> |
| 1539 < Read-only. | |
| 1540 | |
| 170 | 1541 *v:profiling* *profiling-variable* |
| 1621 | 1542 v:profiling Normally zero. Set to one after using ":profile start". |
| 170 | 1543 See |profiling|. |
| 1544 | |
| 7 | 1545 *v:progname* *progname-variable* |
| 1546 v:progname Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was | |
| 1547 invoked. Allows you to do special initialisations for "view", | |
| 1548 "evim" etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim. | |
| 1549 Read-only. | |
| 1550 | |
| 1551 *v:register* *register-variable* | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1552 v:register The name of the register in effect for the current normal mode |
| 2826 | 1553 command. If none is supplied it is the default register '"', |
| 1554 unless 'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then | |
| 1555 it is '*' or '+'. | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1556 Also see |getreg()| and |setreg()| |
| 7 | 1557 |
| 540 | 1558 *v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable* |
| 1559 v:scrollstart String describing the script or function that caused the | |
| 1560 screen to scroll up. It's only set when it is empty, thus the | |
| 1561 first reason is remembered. It is set to "Unknown" for a | |
| 1562 typed command. | |
| 1563 This can be used to find out why your script causes the | |
| 1564 hit-enter prompt. | |
| 1565 | |
| 7 | 1566 *v:servername* *servername-variable* |
| 1567 v:servername The resulting registered |x11-clientserver| name if any. | |
| 1568 Read-only. | |
| 1569 | |
| 1621 | 1570 |
| 1571 v:searchforward *v:searchforward* *searchforward-variable* | |
| 1572 Search direction: 1 after a forward search, 0 after a | |
| 1573 backward search. It is reset to forward when directly setting | |
| 1574 the last search pattern, see |quote/|. | |
| 1575 Note that the value is restored when returning from a | |
| 1576 function. |function-search-undo|. | |
| 1577 Read-write. | |
| 1578 | |
| 7 | 1579 *v:shell_error* *shell_error-variable* |
| 1580 v:shell_error Result of the last shell command. When non-zero, the last | |
| 1581 shell command had an error. When zero, there was no problem. | |
| 1582 This only works when the shell returns the error code to Vim. | |
| 1583 The value -1 is often used when the command could not be | |
| 1584 executed. Read-only. | |
| 1585 Example: > | |
| 1586 :!mv foo bar | |
| 1587 :if v:shell_error | |
| 1588 : echo 'could not rename "foo" to "bar"!' | |
| 1589 :endif | |
| 1590 < "shell_error" also works, for backwards compatibility. | |
| 1591 | |
| 1592 *v:statusmsg* *statusmsg-variable* | |
| 1593 v:statusmsg Last given status message. It's allowed to set this variable. | |
| 1594 | |
| 579 | 1595 *v:swapname* *swapname-variable* |
| 1596 v:swapname Only valid when executing |SwapExists| autocommands: Name of | |
| 1597 the swap file found. Read-only. | |
| 1598 | |
| 1599 *v:swapchoice* *swapchoice-variable* | |
| 1600 v:swapchoice |SwapExists| autocommands can set this to the selected choice | |
| 1601 for handling an existing swap file: | |
| 1602 'o' Open read-only | |
| 1603 'e' Edit anyway | |
| 1604 'r' Recover | |
| 1605 'd' Delete swapfile | |
| 1606 'q' Quit | |
| 1607 'a' Abort | |
| 1621 | 1608 The value should be a single-character string. An empty value |
| 579 | 1609 results in the user being asked, as would happen when there is |
| 1610 no SwapExists autocommand. The default is empty. | |
| 1611 | |
| 590 | 1612 *v:swapcommand* *swapcommand-variable* |
| 625 | 1613 v:swapcommand Normal mode command to be executed after a file has been |
| 590 | 1614 opened. Can be used for a |SwapExists| autocommand to have |
| 1621 | 1615 another Vim open the file and jump to the right place. For |
| 590 | 1616 example, when jumping to a tag the value is ":tag tagname\r". |
| 716 | 1617 For ":edit +cmd file" the value is ":cmd\r". |
| 590 | 1618 |
| 7 | 1619 *v:termresponse* *termresponse-variable* |
| 1620 v:termresponse The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV| | |
| 1621 | 1621 termcap entry. It is set when Vim receives an escape sequence |
| 7 | 1622 that starts with ESC [ or CSI and ends in a 'c', with only |
| 1623 digits, ';' and '.' in between. | |
| 1624 When this option is set, the TermResponse autocommand event is | |
| 1625 fired, so that you can react to the response from the | |
| 1626 terminal. | |
| 1627 The response from a new xterm is: "<Esc>[ Pp ; Pv ; Pc c". Pp | |
| 1628 is the terminal type: 0 for vt100 and 1 for vt220. Pv is the | |
| 1629 patch level (since this was introduced in patch 95, it's | |
| 1630 always 95 or bigger). Pc is always zero. | |
| 1631 {only when compiled with |+termresponse| feature} | |
| 1632 | |
| 1633 *v:this_session* *this_session-variable* | |
| 1634 v:this_session Full filename of the last loaded or saved session file. See | |
| 1635 |:mksession|. It is allowed to set this variable. When no | |
| 1636 session file has been saved, this variable is empty. | |
| 1637 "this_session" also works, for backwards compatibility. | |
| 1638 | |
| 1639 *v:throwpoint* *throwpoint-variable* | |
| 1640 v:throwpoint The point where the exception most recently caught and not | |
| 1621 | 1641 finished was thrown. Not set when commands are typed. See |
| 7 | 1642 also |v:exception| and |throw-variables|. |
| 1643 Example: > | |
| 1644 :try | |
| 1645 : throw "oops" | |
| 1646 :catch /.*/ | |
| 1647 : echo "Exception from" v:throwpoint | |
| 1648 :endtry | |
| 1649 < Output: "Exception from test.vim, line 2" | |
| 1650 | |
| 102 | 1651 *v:val* *val-variable* |
| 1621 | 1652 v:val Value of the current item of a |List| or |Dictionary|. Only |
| 685 | 1653 valid while evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |
| 102 | 1654 |filter()|. Read-only. |
| 1655 | |
| 7 | 1656 *v:version* *version-variable* |
| 1657 v:version Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus | |
| 1658 minor version number. Version 5.0 is 500. Version 5.1 (5.01) | |
| 1659 is 501. Read-only. "version" also works, for backwards | |
| 1660 compatibility. | |
| 1661 Use |has()| to check if a certain patch was included, e.g.: > | |
| 1662 if has("patch123") | |
| 1663 < Note that patch numbers are specific to the version, thus both | |
| 1664 version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are | |
| 1665 completely different. | |
| 1666 | |
| 1667 *v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable* | |
| 1668 v:warningmsg Last given warning message. It's allowed to set this variable. | |
| 1669 | |
| 2609 | 1670 *v:windowid* *windowid-variable* |
| 1671 v:windowid When any X11 based GUI is running or when running in a | |
| 1672 terminal and Vim connects to the X server (|-X|) this will be | |
| 2616 | 1673 set to the window ID. |
| 1674 When an MS-Windows GUI is running this will be set to the | |
| 1675 window handle. | |
| 1676 Otherwise the value is zero. | |
| 1677 Note: for windows inside Vim use |winnr()|. | |
| 2609 | 1678 |
| 7 | 1679 ============================================================================== |
| 1680 4. Builtin Functions *functions* | |
| 1681 | |
| 1682 See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for. | |
| 1683 | |
| 236 | 1684 (Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.) |
| 7 | 1685 |
| 1686 USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~ | |
| 1687 | |
| 1621 | 1688 abs( {expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1689 acos( {expr}) Float arc cosine of {expr} |
| 685 | 1690 add( {list}, {item}) List append {item} to |List| {list} |
| 3214 | 1691 and( {expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise AND |
| 55 | 1692 append( {lnum}, {string}) Number append {string} below line {lnum} |
| 161 | 1693 append( {lnum}, {list}) Number append lines {list} below line {lnum} |
| 7 | 1694 argc() Number number of files in the argument list |
| 55 | 1695 argidx() Number current index in the argument list |
| 7 | 1696 argv( {nr}) String {nr} entry of the argument list |
| 818 | 1697 argv( ) List the argument list |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1698 asin( {expr}) Float arc sine of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1699 atan( {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1700 atan2( {expr}, {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2} |
| 7 | 1701 browse( {save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) |
| 1702 String put up a file requester | |
| 1621 | 1703 browsedir( {title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester |
| 7 | 1704 bufexists( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} exists |
| 55 | 1705 buflisted( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is listed |
| 1706 bufloaded( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is loaded | |
| 7 | 1707 bufname( {expr}) String Name of the buffer {expr} |
| 1708 bufnr( {expr}) Number Number of the buffer {expr} | |
| 1709 bufwinnr( {expr}) Number window number of buffer {expr} | |
| 1710 byte2line( {byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte} | |
| 55 | 1711 byteidx( {expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr} |
| 102 | 1712 call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) |
| 1713 any call {func} with arguments {arglist} | |
| 1621 | 1714 ceil( {expr}) Float round {expr} up |
| 1715 changenr() Number current change number | |
| 7 | 1716 char2nr( {expr}) Number ASCII value of first char in {expr} |
| 55 | 1717 cindent( {lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum} |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1718 clearmatches() none clear all matches |
| 7 | 1719 col( {expr}) Number column nr of cursor or mark |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1720 complete( {startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion |
| 464 | 1721 complete_add( {expr}) Number add completion match |
| 1621 | 1722 complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion |
| 7 | 1723 confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) |
| 1724 Number number of choice picked by user | |
| 55 | 1725 copy( {expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1726 cos( {expr}) Float cosine of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1727 cosh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic cosine of {expr} |
| 95 | 1728 count( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) |
| 1729 Number count how many {expr} are in {list} | |
| 7 | 1730 cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) |
| 1731 Number checks existence of cscope connection | |
| 703 | 1732 cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {coladd}]) |
| 1733 Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {coladd} | |
| 1734 cursor( {list}) Number move cursor to position in {list} | |
| 55 | 1735 deepcopy( {expr}) any make a full copy of {expr} |
| 7 | 1736 delete( {fname}) Number delete file {fname} |
| 1737 did_filetype() Number TRUE if FileType autocommand event used | |
| 55 | 1738 diff_filler( {lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum} |
| 1739 diff_hlID( {lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col} | |
| 85 | 1740 empty( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is empty |
| 7 | 1741 escape( {string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\' |
| 205 | 1742 eval( {string}) any evaluate {string} into its value |
| 55 | 1743 eventhandler( ) Number TRUE if inside an event handler |
| 7 | 1744 executable( {expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists |
| 1745 exists( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} exists | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1746 extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) |
| 824 | 1747 List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1748 exp( {expr}) Float exponential of {expr} |
| 3398 | 1749 expand( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) |
| 1750 any expand special keywords in {expr} | |
| 1621 | 1751 feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer |
| 7 | 1752 filereadable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a readable file |
| 824 | 1753 filewritable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a writable file |
| 102 | 1754 filter( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict remove items from {expr} where |
| 1755 {string} is 0 | |
| 95 | 1756 finddir( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) |
| 824 | 1757 String find directory {name} in {path} |
| 19 | 1758 findfile( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) |
| 824 | 1759 String find file {name} in {path} |
| 1621 | 1760 float2nr( {expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number |
| 1761 floor( {expr}) Float round {expr} down | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1762 fmod( {expr1}, {expr2}) Float remainder of {expr1} / {expr2} |
| 1586 | 1763 fnameescape( {fname}) String escape special characters in {fname} |
| 7 | 1764 fnamemodify( {fname}, {mods}) String modify file name |
| 55 | 1765 foldclosed( {lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed |
| 1766 foldclosedend( {lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed | |
| 7 | 1767 foldlevel( {lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum} |
| 55 | 1768 foldtext( ) String line displayed for closed fold |
| 824 | 1769 foldtextresult( {lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum} |
| 7 | 1770 foreground( ) Number bring the Vim window to the foreground |
| 55 | 1771 function( {name}) Funcref reference to function {name} |
| 3224 | 1772 garbagecollect( [{atexit}]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references |
| 82 | 1773 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def} |
| 102 | 1774 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def} |
| 435 | 1775 getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}]) |
| 1776 List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr} | |
| 824 | 1777 getbufvar( {expr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in buffer {expr} |
| 55 | 1778 getchar( [expr]) Number get one character from the user |
| 1779 getcharmod( ) Number modifiers for the last typed character | |
| 7 | 1780 getcmdline() String return the current command-line |
| 1781 getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line | |
| 531 | 1782 getcmdtype() String return the current command-line type |
| 7 | 1783 getcwd() String the current working directory |
| 20 | 1784 getfperm( {fname}) String file permissions of file {fname} |
| 1785 getfsize( {fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname} | |
| 37 | 1786 getfontname( [{name}]) String name of font being used |
| 7 | 1787 getftime( {fname}) Number last modification time of file |
| 20 | 1788 getftype( {fname}) String description of type of file {fname} |
| 161 | 1789 getline( {lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer |
| 1790 getline( {lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1791 getloclist( {nr}) List list of location list items |
| 1326 | 1792 getmatches() List list of current matches |
| 1548 | 1793 getpid() Number process ID of Vim |
| 703 | 1794 getpos( {expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. |
| 230 | 1795 getqflist() List list of quickfix items |
| 282 | 1796 getreg( [{regname} [, 1]]) String contents of register |
| 55 | 1797 getregtype( [{regname}]) String type of register |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
1798 gettabvar( {nr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in tab {nr} |
| 831 | 1799 gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name}) |
| 1800 any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} | |
| 7 | 1801 getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window |
| 1802 getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window | |
| 824 | 1803 getwinvar( {nr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in window {nr} |
| 3398 | 1804 glob( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) |
| 1805 any expand file wildcards in {expr} | |
| 1754 | 1806 globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {flag}]) |
| 1807 String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path} | |
| 7 | 1808 has( {feature}) Number TRUE if feature {feature} supported |
| 102 | 1809 has_key( {dict}, {key}) Number TRUE if {dict} has entry {key} |
| 1104 | 1810 haslocaldir() Number TRUE if current window executed |:lcd| |
| 782 | 1811 hasmapto( {what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) |
| 1812 Number TRUE if mapping to {what} exists | |
| 7 | 1813 histadd( {history},{item}) String add an item to a history |
| 1814 histdel( {history} [, {item}]) String remove an item from a history | |
| 1815 histget( {history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history | |
| 1816 histnr( {history}) Number highest index of a history | |
| 1817 hlexists( {name}) Number TRUE if highlight group {name} exists | |
| 1818 hlID( {name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name} | |
| 1819 hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on | |
| 55 | 1820 iconv( {expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr} |
| 1821 indent( {lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum} | |
| 95 | 1822 index( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) |
| 1823 Number index in {list} where {expr} appears | |
| 531 | 1824 input( {prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) |
| 1825 String get input from the user | |
| 7 | 1826 inputdialog( {p} [, {t} [, {c}]]) String like input() but in a GUI dialog |
| 824 | 1827 inputlist( {textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list |
| 55 | 1828 inputrestore() Number restore typeahead |
| 1829 inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead | |
| 7 | 1830 inputsecret( {prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text |
| 55 | 1831 insert( {list}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {list} [before {idx}] |
| 3214 | 1832 invert( {expr}) Number bitwise invert |
| 7 | 1833 isdirectory( {directory}) Number TRUE if {directory} is a directory |
| 148 | 1834 islocked( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is locked |
| 685 | 1835 items( {dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict} |
| 95 | 1836 join( {list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String |
| 685 | 1837 keys( {dict}) List keys in {dict} |
| 55 | 1838 len( {expr}) Number the length of {expr} |
| 1839 libcall( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg} | |
| 7 | 1840 libcallnr( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number |
| 1841 line( {expr}) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark | |
| 1842 line2byte( {lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum} | |
| 55 | 1843 lispindent( {lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum} |
| 7 | 1844 localtime() Number current time |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1845 log( {expr}) Float natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1846 log10( {expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 |
| 102 | 1847 map( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict change each item in {expr} to {expr} |
| 2610 | 1848 maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) |
| 3224 | 1849 String or Dict |
| 1850 rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode} | |
| 782 | 1851 mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) |
| 1852 String check for mappings matching {name} | |
| 19 | 1853 match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 7 | 1854 Number position where {pat} matches in {expr} |
| 1326 | 1855 matchadd( {group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]]) |
| 1856 Number highlight {pattern} with {group} | |
| 819 | 1857 matcharg( {nr}) List arguments of |:match| |
| 1326 | 1858 matchdelete( {id}) Number delete match identified by {id} |
| 19 | 1859 matchend( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 7 | 1860 Number position where {pat} ends in {expr} |
| 158 | 1861 matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 1862 List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr} | |
| 19 | 1863 matchstr( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 1864 String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1865 max( {list}) Number maximum value of items in {list} |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1866 min( {list}) Number minimum value of items in {list} |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1867 mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]]) |
| 168 | 1868 Number create directory {name} |
| 1621 | 1869 mode( [expr]) String current editing mode |
|
2050
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
1870 mzeval( {expr}) any evaluate |MzScheme| expression |
| 7 | 1871 nextnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum} |
| 1872 nr2char( {expr}) String single char with ASCII value {expr} | |
| 3214 | 1873 or( {expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise OR |
| 819 | 1874 pathshorten( {expr}) String shorten directory names in a path |
| 1621 | 1875 pow( {x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y} |
| 7 | 1876 prevnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum} |
| 1621 | 1877 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text |
| 1878 pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible | |
| 99 | 1879 range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) |
| 1880 List items from {expr} to {max} | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1881 readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]]) |
| 168 | 1882 List get list of lines from file {fname} |
| 794 | 1883 reltime( [{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value |
| 1884 reltimestr( {time}) String turn time value into a String | |
| 7 | 1885 remote_expr( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) |
| 1886 String send expression | |
| 1887 remote_foreground( {server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground | |
| 1888 remote_peek( {serverid} [, {retvar}]) | |
| 1889 Number check for reply string | |
| 1890 remote_read( {serverid}) String read reply string | |
| 1891 remote_send( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) | |
| 1892 String send key sequence | |
| 79 | 1893 remove( {list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any remove items {idx}-{end} from {list} |
| 856 | 1894 remove( {dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict} |
| 55 | 1895 rename( {from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to} |
| 1896 repeat( {expr}, {count}) String repeat {expr} {count} times | |
| 1897 resolve( {filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to | |
| 82 | 1898 reverse( {list}) List reverse {list} in-place |
| 1621 | 1899 round( {expr}) Float round off {expr} |
| 1496 | 1900 search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) |
| 1901 Number search for {pattern} | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1902 searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) |
| 1621 | 1903 Number search for variable declaration |
| 1496 | 1904 searchpair( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) |
| 55 | 1905 Number search for other end of start/end pair |
| 1496 | 1906 searchpairpos( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) |
| 667 | 1907 List search for other end of start/end pair |
| 1496 | 1908 searchpos( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) |
| 667 | 1909 List search for {pattern} |
| 7 | 1910 server2client( {clientid}, {string}) |
| 1911 Number send reply string | |
| 1912 serverlist() String get a list of available servers | |
| 1913 setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val} | |
| 1914 setcmdpos( {pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line | |
| 1915 setline( {lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line} | |
| 647 | 1916 setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}]) |
| 1917 Number modify location list using {list} | |
| 1326 | 1918 setmatches( {list}) Number restore a list of matches |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1919 setpos( {expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} |
| 647 | 1920 setqflist( {list}[, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list} |
| 55 | 1921 setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
1922 settabvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val} |
| 831 | 1923 settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window |
| 1924 {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val} | |
| 7 | 1925 setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window {nr} to {val} |
| 1661 | 1926 shellescape( {string} [, {special}]) |
| 1927 String escape {string} for use as shell | |
| 985 | 1928 command argument |
| 55 | 1929 simplify( {filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible |
| 1621 | 1930 sin( {expr}) Float sine of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1931 sinh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic sine of {expr} |
| 2902 | 1932 sort( {list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) |
| 1933 List sort {list}, using {func} to compare | |
| 374 | 1934 soundfold( {word}) String sound-fold {word} |
| 344 | 1935 spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor |
| 537 | 1936 spellsuggest( {word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) |
| 1937 List spelling suggestions | |
| 282 | 1938 split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]]) |
| 685 | 1939 List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr} |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1940 sqrt( {expr}) Float square root of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1941 str2float( {expr}) Float convert String to Float |
| 1942 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) Number convert String to Number | |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1943 strchars( {expr}) Number character length of the String {expr} |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
1944 strdisplaywidth( {expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr} |
| 7 | 1945 strftime( {format}[, {time}]) String time in specified format |
| 133 | 1946 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}]) |
| 1947 Number index of {needle} in {haystack} | |
| 95 | 1948 string( {expr}) String String representation of {expr} value |
| 7 | 1949 strlen( {expr}) Number length of the String {expr} |
| 1950 strpart( {src}, {start}[, {len}]) | |
| 1951 String {len} characters of {src} at {start} | |
| 140 | 1952 strridx( {haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) |
| 1953 Number last index of {needle} in {haystack} | |
| 7 | 1954 strtrans( {expr}) String translate string to make it printable |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1955 strwidth( {expr}) Number display cell length of the String {expr} |
| 2908 | 1956 submatch( {nr}) String specific match in ":s" or substitute() |
| 7 | 1957 substitute( {expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) |
| 1958 String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub} | |
| 32 | 1959 synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col} |
| 7 | 1960 synIDattr( {synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) |
| 1961 String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID} | |
| 1962 synIDtrans( {synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID} | |
|
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
1963 synconcealed( {lnum}, {col}) List info about concealing |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1964 synstack( {lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col} |
| 24 | 1965 system( {expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr} |
| 677 | 1966 tabpagebuflist( [{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page |
| 1967 tabpagenr( [{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page | |
| 1968 tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}]) | |
| 1969 Number number of current window in tab page | |
| 1970 taglist( {expr}) List list of tags matching {expr} | |
| 1621 | 1971 tagfiles() List tags files used |
| 7 | 1972 tempname() String name for a temporary file |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1973 tan( {expr}) Float tangent of {expr} |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1974 tanh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic tangent of {expr} |
| 7 | 1975 tolower( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase |
| 1976 toupper( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase | |
| 15 | 1977 tr( {src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr} |
| 1978 to chars in {tostr} | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1979 trunc( {expr}) Float truncate Float {expr} |
| 7 | 1980 type( {name}) Number type of variable {name} |
|
2236
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
1981 undofile( {name}) String undo file name for {name} |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
1982 undotree() List undo file tree |
| 685 | 1983 values( {dict}) List values in {dict} |
| 7 | 1984 virtcol( {expr}) Number screen column of cursor or mark |
| 1985 visualmode( [expr]) String last visual mode used | |
| 1986 winbufnr( {nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr} | |
| 1987 wincol() Number window column of the cursor | |
| 1988 winheight( {nr}) Number height of window {nr} | |
| 1989 winline() Number window line of the cursor | |
| 674 | 1990 winnr( [{expr}]) Number number of current window |
| 55 | 1991 winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1992 winrestview( {dict}) none restore view of current window |
| 712 | 1993 winsaveview() Dict save view of current window |
| 7 | 1994 winwidth( {nr}) Number width of window {nr} |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1995 writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {binary}]) |
| 158 | 1996 Number write list of lines to file {fname} |
| 3214 | 1997 xor( {expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise XOR |
| 7 | 1998 |
| 1621 | 1999 abs({expr}) *abs()* |
| 2000 Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to | |
| 2001 a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be | |
| 2002 converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise | |
| 2003 abs() gives an error message and returns -1. | |
| 2004 Examples: > | |
| 2005 echo abs(1.456) | |
| 2006 < 1.456 > | |
| 2007 echo abs(-5.456) | |
| 2008 < 5.456 > | |
| 2009 echo abs(-4) | |
| 2010 < 4 | |
| 2011 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2012 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2013 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2014 acos({expr}) *acos()* |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2015 Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2016 |Float| in the range of [0, pi]. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2017 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2018 [-1, 1]. |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2019 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2020 :echo acos(0) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2021 < 1.570796 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2022 :echo acos(-0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2023 < 2.094395 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2024 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2025 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2026 |
| 82 | 2027 add({list}, {expr}) *add()* |
| 685 | 2028 Append the item {expr} to |List| {list}. Returns the |
| 2029 resulting |List|. Examples: > | |
| 82 | 2030 :let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item) |
| 2031 :call add(mylist, "woodstock") | |
| 685 | 2032 < Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single |
| 692 | 2033 item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. |
| 85 | 2034 Use |insert()| to add an item at another position. |
| 55 | 2035 |
| 82 | 2036 |
| 3214 | 2037 and({expr}, {expr}) *and()* |
| 2038 Bitwise AND on the two arguments. The arguments are converted | |
| 2039 to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. | |
| 2040 Example: > | |
| 2041 :let flag = and(bits, 0x80) | |
| 2042 | |
| 2043 | |
| 82 | 2044 append({lnum}, {expr}) *append()* |
| 685 | 2045 When {expr} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a |
| 2046 text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer. | |
| 153 | 2047 Otherwise append {expr} as one text line below line {lnum} in |
| 2048 the current buffer. | |
| 2049 {lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one. | |
| 82 | 2050 Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory), |
| 1621 | 2051 0 for success. Example: > |
| 55 | 2052 :let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END") |
| 82 | 2053 :let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"]) |
| 55 | 2054 < |
| 7 | 2055 *argc()* |
| 2056 argc() The result is the number of files in the argument list of the | |
| 2057 current window. See |arglist|. | |
| 2058 | |
| 2059 *argidx()* | |
| 2060 argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is | |
| 2061 the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|. | |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 *argv()* | |
| 818 | 2064 argv([{nr}]) The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the |
| 7 | 2065 current window. See |arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one. |
| 2066 Example: > | |
| 2067 :let i = 0 | |
| 2068 :while i < argc() | |
| 1621 | 2069 : let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.') |
| 7 | 2070 : exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>' |
| 2071 : let i = i + 1 | |
| 2072 :endwhile | |
| 818 | 2073 < Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is |
| 2074 returned. | |
| 2075 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2076 asin({expr}) *asin()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2077 Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float| |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2078 in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2079 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2080 [-1, 1]. |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2081 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2082 :echo asin(0.8) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2083 < 0.927295 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2084 :echo asin(-0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2085 < -0.523599 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2086 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2087 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2088 |
| 1621 | 2089 atan({expr}) *atan()* |
| 2090 Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in | |
| 2091 the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|. | |
| 2092 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2093 Examples: > | |
| 2094 :echo atan(100) | |
| 2095 < 1.560797 > | |
| 2096 :echo atan(-4.01) | |
| 2097 < -1.326405 | |
| 2098 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2099 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2100 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2101 atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) *atan2()* |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2102 Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2103 radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi]. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2104 {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2105 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2106 :echo atan2(-1, 1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2107 < -0.785398 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2108 :echo atan2(1, -1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2109 < 2.356194 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2110 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2111 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2112 |
| 7 | 2113 *browse()* |
| 2114 browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) | |
| 2115 Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")" | |
| 2116 returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions). | |
| 2117 The input fields are: | |
| 2118 {save} when non-zero, select file to write | |
| 2119 {title} title for the requester | |
| 2120 {initdir} directory to start browsing in | |
| 2121 {default} default file name | |
| 2122 When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or | |
| 2123 browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned. | |
| 2124 | |
| 29 | 2125 *browsedir()* |
| 2126 browsedir({title}, {initdir}) | |
| 2127 Put up a directory requester. This only works when | |
| 2128 "has("browse")" returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions). | |
| 2129 On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file | |
| 2130 browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory | |
| 2131 to be used. | |
| 2132 The input fields are: | |
| 2133 {title} title for the requester | |
| 2134 {initdir} directory to start browsing in | |
| 2135 When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or | |
| 2136 browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned. | |
| 2137 | |
| 7 | 2138 bufexists({expr}) *bufexists()* |
| 2139 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called | |
| 2140 {expr} exists. | |
| 9 | 2141 If the {expr} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used. |
| 7 | 2142 If the {expr} argument is a string it must match a buffer name |
| 9 | 2143 exactly. The name can be: |
| 2144 - Relative to the current directory. | |
| 2145 - A full path. | |
| 1621 | 2146 - The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile". |
| 9 | 2147 - A URL name. |
| 7 | 2148 Unlisted buffers will be found. |
| 2149 Note that help files are listed by their short name in the | |
| 2150 output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their | |
| 2151 long name to be able to find them. | |
| 1621 | 2152 bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name |
| 2153 with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp | |
| 2154 for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1" | |
| 7 | 2155 Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate |
| 2156 file name. | |
| 2157 *buffer_exists()* | |
| 2158 Obsolete name: buffer_exists(). | |
| 2159 | |
| 2160 buflisted({expr}) *buflisted()* | |
| 2161 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called | |
| 2162 {expr} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set). | |
| 9 | 2163 The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. |
| 7 | 2164 |
| 2165 bufloaded({expr}) *bufloaded()* | |
| 2166 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called | |
| 2167 {expr} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden). | |
| 9 | 2168 The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. |
| 7 | 2169 |
| 2170 bufname({expr}) *bufname()* | |
| 2171 The result is the name of a buffer, as it is displayed by the | |
| 2172 ":ls" command. | |
| 2173 If {expr} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given. | |
| 2174 Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window. | |
| 2175 If {expr} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match | |
| 1621 | 2176 with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is |
| 7 | 2177 set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one |
| 2178 match an empty string is returned. | |
| 2179 "" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the | |
| 2180 alternate buffer. | |
| 2181 A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end | |
| 1156 | 2182 or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a |
| 2183 full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the | |
| 2184 pattern. | |
| 7 | 2185 Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match |
| 2186 with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted | |
| 2187 buffers are searched for. | |
| 2188 If the {expr} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer | |
| 2189 number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: > | |
| 2190 :echo bufname("3" + 0) | |
| 2191 < If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty | |
| 2192 string is returned. > | |
| 2193 bufname("#") alternate buffer name | |
| 2194 bufname(3) name of buffer 3 | |
| 2195 bufname("%") name of current buffer | |
| 2196 bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches. | |
| 2197 < *buffer_name()* | |
| 2198 Obsolete name: buffer_name(). | |
| 2199 | |
| 2200 *bufnr()* | |
| 707 | 2201 bufnr({expr} [, {create}]) |
| 2202 The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by | |
| 7 | 2203 the ":ls" command. For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| |
| 707 | 2204 above. |
| 2205 If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the | |
| 2206 {create} argument is present and not zero, a new, unlisted, | |
| 2207 buffer is created and its number is returned. | |
| 7 | 2208 bufnr("$") is the last buffer: > |
| 2209 :let last_buffer = bufnr("$") | |
| 2210 < The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number | |
| 2211 of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller | |
| 2212 number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed | |
| 2213 them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer. | |
| 2214 *buffer_number()* | |
| 2215 Obsolete name: buffer_number(). | |
| 2216 *last_buffer_nr()* | |
| 2217 Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr(). | |
| 2218 | |
| 2219 bufwinnr({expr}) *bufwinnr()* | |
| 2220 The result is a Number, which is the number of the first | |
| 2221 window associated with buffer {expr}. For the use of {expr}, | |
| 1621 | 2222 see |bufname()| above. If buffer {expr} doesn't exist or |
| 7 | 2223 there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: > |
| 2224 | |
| 2225 echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinnr(1)) | |
| 2226 | |
| 2227 < The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" | |
| 2228 |:wincmd|. | |
| 1156 | 2229 Only deals with the current tab page. |
| 7 | 2230 |
| 2231 | |
| 2232 byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()* | |
| 2233 Return the line number that contains the character at byte | |
| 2234 count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the | |
| 2235 end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option | |
| 2236 for the current buffer. The first character has byte count | |
| 2237 one. | |
| 2238 Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|. | |
| 2239 {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset| | |
| 2240 feature} | |
| 2241 | |
| 18 | 2242 byteidx({expr}, {nr}) *byteidx()* |
| 2243 Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the string | |
| 2244 {expr}. Use zero for the first character, it returns zero. | |
| 2245 This function is only useful when there are multibyte | |
| 2246 characters, otherwise the returned value is equal to {nr}. | |
| 2247 Composing characters are counted as a separate character. | |
| 2248 Example : > | |
| 2249 echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3)) | |
| 2250 < will display the fourth character. Another way to do the | |
| 2251 same: > | |
| 2252 let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3)) | |
| 2253 echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1)) | |
| 2254 < If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned. | |
| 2255 If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string | |
| 2256 is returned. | |
| 2257 | |
| 102 | 2258 call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699* |
| 685 | 2259 Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as |
| 79 | 2260 arguments. |
| 685 | 2261 {func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function. |
| 79 | 2262 a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line. |
| 2263 Returns the return value of the called function. | |
| 102 | 2264 {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be |
| 2265 used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| | |
| 79 | 2266 |
| 1621 | 2267 ceil({expr}) *ceil()* |
| 2268 Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to | |
| 2269 {expr} as a |Float| (round up). | |
| 2270 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2271 Examples: > | |
| 2272 echo ceil(1.456) | |
| 2273 < 2.0 > | |
| 2274 echo ceil(-5.456) | |
| 2275 < -5.0 > | |
| 2276 echo ceil(4.0) | |
| 2277 < 4.0 | |
| 2278 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2279 | |
| 777 | 2280 changenr() *changenr()* |
| 2281 Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same | |
| 2282 number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used | |
| 2283 with the |:undo| command. | |
| 2284 When a change was made it is the number of that change. After | |
| 2285 redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is | |
| 2286 one less than the number of the undone change. | |
| 2287 | |
| 7 | 2288 char2nr({expr}) *char2nr()* |
| 2289 Return number value of the first char in {expr}. Examples: > | |
| 2290 char2nr(" ") returns 32 | |
| 2291 char2nr("ABC") returns 65 | |
| 2292 < The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": > | |
| 1156 | 2293 char2nr("á") returns 225 |
| 2294 char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195 | |
| 2965 | 2295 < A combining character is a separate character. |
| 2296 |nr2char()| does the opposite. | |
| 7 | 2297 |
| 2298 cindent({lnum}) *cindent()* | |
| 2299 Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C | |
| 2300 indenting rules, as with 'cindent'. | |
| 2301 The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is | |
| 2302 relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. | |
| 2303 When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the |+cindent| | |
| 2304 feature, -1 is returned. | |
| 548 | 2305 See |C-indenting|. |
| 7 | 2306 |
| 1326 | 2307 clearmatches() *clearmatches()* |
| 2308 Clears all matches previously defined by |matchadd()| and the | |
| 2309 |:match| commands. | |
| 2310 | |
| 7 | 2311 *col()* |
| 24 | 2312 col({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column |
| 7 | 2313 position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are: |
| 2314 . the cursor position | |
| 2315 $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the | |
| 2316 number of characters in the cursor line plus one) | |
| 2317 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is | |
| 2318 returned) | |
| 1317 | 2319 Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line |
| 2320 and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get | |
| 1621 | 2321 the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is |
| 1317 | 2322 out of range then col() returns zero. |
| 1156 | 2323 To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use |
| 703 | 2324 |getpos()|. |
| 7 | 2325 For the screen column position use |virtcol()|. |
| 2326 Note that only marks in the current file can be used. | |
| 2327 Examples: > | |
| 2328 col(".") column of cursor | |
| 2329 col("$") length of cursor line plus one | |
| 2330 col("'t") column of mark t | |
| 2331 col("'" . markname) column of mark markname | |
| 1621 | 2332 < The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error. |
| 1156 | 2333 For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another |
| 2334 buffer. | |
| 7 | 2335 For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the |
| 2336 column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the | |
| 2337 line. This can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: > | |
| 2338 :imap <F2> <C-O>:let save_ve = &ve<CR> | |
| 2339 \<C-O>:set ve=all<CR> | |
| 2340 \<C-O>:echo col(".") . "\n" <Bar> | |
| 2341 \let &ve = save_ve<CR> | |
| 2342 < | |
| 464 | 2343 |
| 724 | 2344 complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785* |
| 2345 Set the matches for Insert mode completion. | |
| 2346 Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping | |
| 1156 | 2347 with CTRL-R = |i_CTRL-R|. It does not work after CTRL-O or |
| 2348 with an expression mapping. | |
| 724 | 2349 {startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed |
| 2350 text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text | |
| 2351 that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an | |
| 2352 empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a | |
| 2353 match. | |
| 2354 {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match. | |
| 2355 See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible. | |
| 2356 Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
2357 inserting anything that would cause completion to stop. |
| 724 | 2358 The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with |
| 2359 Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if | |
| 2360 specified, see |ins-completion-menu|. | |
| 2361 Example: > | |
| 1156 | 2362 inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR> |
| 724 | 2363 |
| 2364 func! ListMonths() | |
| 2365 call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March', | |
| 2366 \ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September', | |
| 2367 \ 'October', 'November', 'December']) | |
| 2368 return '' | |
| 2369 endfunc | |
| 2370 < This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that | |
| 2371 an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted. | |
| 2372 | |
| 464 | 2373 complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()* |
| 2374 Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the | |
| 2375 function specified with the 'completefunc' option. | |
| 2376 Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory), | |
| 2377 1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in | |
| 2378 the list. | |
| 1621 | 2379 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is |
| 786 | 2380 the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return. |
| 464 | 2381 |
| 2382 complete_check() *complete_check()* | |
| 2383 Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches. | |
| 2384 This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time. | |
| 2385 Returns non-zero when searching for matches is to be aborted, | |
| 2386 zero otherwise. | |
| 2387 Only to be used by the function specified with the | |
| 2388 'completefunc' option. | |
| 2389 | |
| 7 | 2390 *confirm()* |
| 2391 confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) | |
| 2392 Confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be | |
| 2393 made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first | |
| 2394 choice this is 1. | |
| 2395 Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog | |
| 2396 support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2397 |
| 7 | 2398 {msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the |
| 2399 alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is | |
| 2400 used (and translated). | |
| 2401 {msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on | |
| 2402 some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2403 |
| 7 | 2404 {choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated |
| 2405 by '\n', e.g. > | |
| 2406 confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel") | |
| 2407 < The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice. | |
| 2408 Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does | |
| 2409 not need to be the first letter: > | |
| 2410 confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All") | |
| 2411 < For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as | |
| 2412 the default shortcut key. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2413 |
| 7 | 2414 The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice |
| 2415 that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first | |
| 2416 choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If | |
| 2417 {default} is omitted, 1 is used. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2418 |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2419 The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog. This |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2420 is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and Win32 |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2421 GUI. It can be one of these values: "Error", "Question", |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2422 "Info", "Warning" or "Generic". Only the first character is |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2423 relevant. When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is used. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2424 |
| 7 | 2425 If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C, |
| 2426 or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0. | |
| 2427 | |
| 2428 An example: > | |
| 2429 :let choice = confirm("What do you want?", "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2) | |
| 2430 :if choice == 0 | |
| 2431 : echo "make up your mind!" | |
| 2432 :elseif choice == 3 | |
| 2433 : echo "tasteful" | |
| 2434 :else | |
| 2435 : echo "I prefer bananas myself." | |
| 2436 :endif | |
| 2437 < In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons | |
| 2438 depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included, | |
| 1621 | 2439 the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm() |
| 7 | 2440 tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they |
| 2441 don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems | |
| 2442 the horizontal layout is always used. | |
| 2443 | |
| 55 | 2444 *copy()* |
| 1621 | 2445 copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't |
| 55 | 2446 different from using {expr} directly. |
| 685 | 2447 When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means |
| 2448 that the original |List| can be changed without changing the | |
| 1621 | 2449 copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus |
| 2450 changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|. Also | |
| 685 | 2451 see |deepcopy()|. |
| 55 | 2452 |
| 1621 | 2453 cos({expr}) *cos()* |
| 2454 Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. | |
| 2455 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2456 Examples: > | |
| 2457 :echo cos(100) | |
| 2458 < 0.862319 > | |
| 2459 :echo cos(-4.01) | |
| 2460 < -0.646043 | |
| 2461 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2462 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2463 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2464 cosh({expr}) *cosh()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2465 Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2466 [1, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2467 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2468 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2469 :echo cosh(0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2470 < 1.127626 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2471 :echo cosh(-0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2472 < -1.127626 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2473 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2474 |
| 1621 | 2475 |
| 102 | 2476 count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()* |
| 79 | 2477 Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears |
| 685 | 2478 in |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}. |
| 102 | 2479 If {start} is given then start with the item with this index. |
| 685 | 2480 {start} can only be used with a |List|. |
| 79 | 2481 When {ic} is given and it's non-zero then case is ignored. |
| 2482 | |
| 2483 | |
| 7 | 2484 *cscope_connection()* |
| 2485 cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) | |
| 2486 Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no | |
| 2487 parameters are specified, then the function returns: | |
| 2488 0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or | |
| 2489 if there are no cscope connections; | |
| 2490 1, if there is at least one cscope connection. | |
| 2491 | |
| 2492 If parameters are specified, then the value of {num} | |
| 2493 determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked: | |
| 2494 | |
| 2495 {num} Description of existence check | |
| 2496 ----- ------------------------------ | |
| 2497 0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()"). | |
| 2498 1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for | |
| 2499 {dbpath}. | |
| 2500 2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for | |
| 2501 {dbpath}. | |
| 2502 3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both | |
| 2503 {dbpath} and {prepend}. | |
| 2504 4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both | |
| 2505 {dbpath} and {prepend}. | |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive! | |
| 2508 | |
| 2509 Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): > | |
| 2510 | |
| 2511 # pid database name prepend path | |
| 2512 0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local | |
| 2513 < | |
| 2514 Invocation Return Val ~ | |
| 2515 ---------- ---------- > | |
| 2516 cscope_connection() 1 | |
| 2517 cscope_connection(1, "out") 1 | |
| 2518 cscope_connection(2, "out") 0 | |
| 2519 cscope_connection(3, "out") 0 | |
| 2520 cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1 | |
| 2521 cscope_connection(4, "out") 0 | |
| 2522 cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0 | |
| 2523 cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1 | |
| 2524 < | |
| 703 | 2525 cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()* |
| 2526 cursor({list}) | |
| 1156 | 2527 Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the |
| 2528 line {lnum}. The first column is one. | |
| 703 | 2529 When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List| |
| 707 | 2530 with two or three items {lnum}, {col} and {off}. This is like |
| 2531 the return value of |getpos()|, but without the first item. | |
| 7 | 2532 Does not change the jumplist. |
| 2533 If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, | |
| 2534 the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer. | |
| 2535 If {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line. | |
| 493 | 2536 If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line, |
| 7 | 2537 the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the |
| 2538 line. | |
| 2539 If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column. | |
| 703 | 2540 When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in |
| 2541 screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a | |
| 1266 | 2542 position within a <Tab> or after the last character. |
| 1851 | 2543 Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. |
| 7 | 2544 |
| 55 | 2545 |
| 164 | 2546 deepcopy({expr}[, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698* |
| 1621 | 2547 Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't |
| 55 | 2548 different from using {expr} directly. |
| 685 | 2549 When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means |
| 2550 that the original |List| can be changed without changing the | |
| 1621 | 2551 copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List|, a copy for it |
| 55 | 2552 is made, recursively. Thus changing an item in the copy does |
| 685 | 2553 not change the contents of the original |List|. |
| 2554 When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or | |
| 2555 |Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to | |
| 2556 this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a | |
| 2557 |List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means | |
| 2558 that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail. | |
| 114 | 2559 *E724* |
| 2560 Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item | |
| 164 | 2561 that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with |
| 2562 {noref} set to 1 will fail. | |
| 55 | 2563 Also see |copy()|. |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 delete({fname}) *delete()* | |
| 2566 Deletes the file by the name {fname}. The result is a Number, | |
| 7 | 2567 which is 0 if the file was deleted successfully, and non-zero |
| 2568 when the deletion failed. | |
| 685 | 2569 Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|. |
| 7 | 2570 |
| 2571 *did_filetype()* | |
| 2572 did_filetype() Returns non-zero when autocommands are being executed and the | |
| 2573 FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used | |
| 2574 to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts | |
| 2575 that detect the file type. |FileType| | |
| 2576 When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this | |
| 2577 really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the | |
| 2578 current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts | |
| 2579 editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax | |
| 2580 file. | |
| 2581 | |
| 32 | 2582 diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()* |
| 2583 Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}. | |
| 2584 These are the lines that were inserted at this point in | |
| 2585 another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the | |
| 2586 display but don't exist in the buffer. | |
| 2587 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current | |
| 2588 line, "'m" mark m, etc. | |
| 2589 Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode. | |
| 2590 | |
| 2591 diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()* | |
| 2592 Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column | |
| 2593 {col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a | |
| 2594 diff change zero is returned. | |
| 2595 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current | |
| 2596 line, "'m" mark m, etc. | |
| 2597 {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first | |
| 2598 line. | |
| 2599 The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain | |
| 2600 syntax information about the highlighting. | |
| 2601 | |
| 85 | 2602 empty({expr}) *empty()* |
| 2603 Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise. | |
| 685 | 2604 A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any |
| 1621 | 2605 items. A Number is empty when its value is zero. |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
2606 For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the |
| 685 | 2607 length with zero. |
| 85 | 2608 |
| 7 | 2609 escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()* |
| 2610 Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a | |
| 2611 backslash. Example: > | |
| 2612 :echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \') | |
| 2613 < results in: > | |
| 2614 c:\\program\ files\\vim | |
| 1621 | 2615 < Also see |shellescape()|. |
| 2616 | |
| 2617 *eval()* | |
| 95 | 2618 eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to |
| 2619 turn the result of |string()| back into the original value. | |
| 1621 | 2620 This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings and composites of |
| 2621 them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing | |
| 2622 functions. | |
| 95 | 2623 |
| 7 | 2624 eventhandler() *eventhandler()* |
| 2625 Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got | |
| 2626 interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character, | |
| 2627 e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive | |
| 2628 commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned. | |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 executable({expr}) *executable()* | |
| 2631 This function checks if an executable with the name {expr} | |
| 2632 exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any | |
| 10 | 2633 arguments. |
| 2634 executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal | |
| 2635 searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT* | |
| 2636 On MS-DOS and MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can | |
| 2637 optionally be included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are | |
| 1621 | 2638 tried. Thus if "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be |
| 2639 found. If $PATHEXT is not set then ".exe;.com;.bat;.cmd" is | |
| 10 | 2640 used. A dot by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using |
| 1621 | 2641 the name without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a |
| 10 | 2642 Unix shell, then the name is also tried without adding an |
| 2643 extension. | |
| 2644 On MS-DOS and MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and | |
| 2645 is not a directory, not if it's really executable. | |
| 819 | 2646 On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is |
| 2647 always found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it | |
| 2648 should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|. | |
| 7 | 2649 The result is a Number: |
| 2650 1 exists | |
| 2651 0 does not exist | |
| 2652 -1 not implemented on this system | |
| 2653 | |
| 2654 *exists()* | |
| 2655 exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is | |
| 2656 defined, zero otherwise. The {expr} argument is a string, | |
| 2657 which contains one of these: | |
| 2658 &option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists, | |
| 2659 not if it really works) | |
| 2660 +option-name Vim option that works. | |
| 2661 $ENVNAME environment variable (could also be | |
| 2662 done by comparing with an empty | |
| 2663 string) | |
| 2664 *funcname built-in function (see |functions|) | |
| 2665 or user defined function (see | |
| 2666 |user-functions|). | |
| 2667 varname internal variable (see | |
| 1621 | 2668 |internal-variables|). Also works |
| 685 | 2669 for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary| |
| 2670 entries, |List| items, etc. Beware | |
| 1668 | 2671 that evaluating an index may cause an |
| 2672 error message for an invalid | |
| 2673 expression. E.g.: > | |
| 2674 :let l = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 2675 :echo exists("l[5]") | |
| 2676 < 0 > | |
| 2677 :echo exists("l[xx]") | |
| 2678 < E121: Undefined variable: xx | |
| 2679 0 | |
| 7 | 2680 :cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user |
| 2681 command or command modifier |:command|. | |
| 2682 Returns: | |
| 2683 1 for match with start of a command | |
| 2684 2 full match with a command | |
| 2685 3 matches several user commands | |
| 2686 To check for a supported command | |
| 2687 always check the return value to be 2. | |
| 864 | 2688 :2match The |:2match| command. |
| 2689 :3match The |:3match| command. | |
| 7 | 2690 #event autocommand defined for this event |
| 2691 #event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and | |
| 2692 pattern (the pattern is taken | |
| 2693 literally and compared to the | |
| 2694 autocommand patterns character by | |
| 2695 character) | |
| 613 | 2696 #group autocommand group exists |
| 2697 #group#event autocommand defined for this group and | |
| 2698 event. | |
| 2699 #group#event#pattern | |
| 856 | 2700 autocommand defined for this group, |
| 613 | 2701 event and pattern. |
| 615 | 2702 ##event autocommand for this event is |
| 2703 supported. | |
| 7 | 2704 For checking for a supported feature use |has()|. |
| 2705 | |
| 2706 Examples: > | |
| 2707 exists("&shortname") | |
| 2708 exists("$HOSTNAME") | |
| 2709 exists("*strftime") | |
| 2710 exists("*s:MyFunc") | |
| 2711 exists("bufcount") | |
| 2712 exists(":Make") | |
| 613 | 2713 exists("#CursorHold") |
| 7 | 2714 exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz") |
| 613 | 2715 exists("#filetypeindent") |
| 2716 exists("#filetypeindent#FileType") | |
| 2717 exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*") | |
| 615 | 2718 exists("##ColorScheme") |
| 7 | 2719 < There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the |
| 2720 name. | |
| 867 | 2721 There must be no extra characters after the name, although in |
| 2722 a few cases this is ignored. That may become more strict in | |
| 2723 the future, thus don't count on it! | |
| 2724 Working example: > | |
| 2725 exists(":make") | |
| 2726 < NOT working example: > | |
| 2727 exists(":make install") | |
| 859 | 2728 |
| 2729 < Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the | |
| 2730 variable itself. For example: > | |
| 7 | 2731 exists(bufcount) |
| 2732 < This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable, | |
| 853 | 2733 but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists. |
| 7 | 2734 |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2735 exp({expr}) *exp()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2736 Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2737 [0, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2738 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2739 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2740 :echo exp(2) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2741 < 7.389056 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2742 :echo exp(-1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2743 < 0.367879 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2744 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2745 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2746 |
| 7 | 2747 expand({expr} [, {flag}]) *expand()* |
| 2748 Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}. | |
| 2662 | 2749 The result is a String. 'wildignorecase' applies. |
| 7 | 2750 |
| 2751 When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL> | |
| 2752 characters. [Note: in version 5.0 a space was used, which | |
| 2753 caused problems when a file name contains a space] | |
| 2754 | |
| 1621 | 2755 If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name |
| 7 | 2756 for a non-existing file is not included. |
| 2757 | |
| 2758 When {expr} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is done | |
| 2759 like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their associated | |
| 2760 modifiers. Here is a short overview: | |
| 2761 | |
| 2762 % current file name | |
| 2763 # alternate file name | |
| 2764 #n alternate file name n | |
| 2765 <cfile> file name under the cursor | |
| 2766 <afile> autocmd file name | |
| 2767 <abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!) | |
| 2768 <amatch> autocmd matched name | |
| 2769 <sfile> sourced script file name | |
| 2662 | 2770 <slnum> sourced script file line number |
| 7 | 2771 <cword> word under the cursor |
| 2772 <cWORD> WORD under the cursor | |
| 2773 <client> the {clientid} of the last received | |
| 2774 message |server2client()| | |
| 2775 Modifiers: | |
| 2776 :p expand to full path | |
| 2777 :h head (last path component removed) | |
| 2778 :t tail (last path component only) | |
| 2779 :r root (one extension removed) | |
| 2780 :e extension only | |
| 2781 | |
| 2782 Example: > | |
| 2783 :let &tags = expand("%:p:h") . "/tags" | |
| 2784 < Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or | |
| 2785 '<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: > | |
| 2786 :let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak") | |
| 2787 < Use this: > | |
| 2788 :let doeswork = expand("%:h") . ".bak" | |
| 2789 < Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the | |
| 2790 referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>" | |
| 2791 is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the | |
| 2792 "~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: > | |
| 2793 :echo expand(expand("<cfile>")) | |
| 2794 < | |
| 2795 There cannot be white space between the variables and the | |
| 2796 following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used | |
| 2797 to modify normal file names. | |
| 2798 | |
| 2799 When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name | |
| 2800 is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a | |
| 2801 buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a | |
| 2802 '/' added. | |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 When {expr} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is | |
| 2805 expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line. | |
| 2806 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional | |
| 3398 | 2807 {nosuf} argument is given and it is non-zero. |
| 2808 Names for non-existing files are included. The "**" item can | |
| 2809 be used to search in a directory tree. For example, to find | |
| 2810 all "README" files in the current directory and below: > | |
| 444 | 2811 :echo expand("**/README") |
| 2812 < | |
| 7 | 2813 Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment |
| 2814 variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be | |
| 1621 | 2815 slow, because a shell must be started. See |expr-env-expand|. |
| 7 | 2816 The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file |
| 1621 | 2817 names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is |
| 7 | 2818 left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in |
| 2819 "$FOOBAR". | |
| 2820 | |
| 2821 See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for | |
| 2822 getting the raw output of an external command. | |
| 2823 | |
| 102 | 2824 extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()* |
| 692 | 2825 {expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both |
| 2826 |Dictionaries|. | |
| 2827 | |
| 2828 If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}. | |
| 102 | 2829 If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before item |
| 2830 {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero insert before the | |
| 2831 first item. When {expr3} is equal to len({expr1}) then | |
| 2832 {expr2} is appended. | |
| 79 | 2833 Examples: > |
| 2834 :echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5])) | |
| 2835 :call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1) | |
| 1699 | 2836 < When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of |
| 2837 items copied is equal to the original length of the List. | |
| 2838 E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item | |
| 2839 (where N is the original length of the List). | |
| 2840 Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate | |
| 82 | 2841 two lists into a new list use the + operator: > |
| 79 | 2842 :let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5] |
| 102 | 2843 < |
| 692 | 2844 If they are |Dictionaries|: |
| 102 | 2845 Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}. |
| 2846 If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is | |
| 2847 used to decide what to do: | |
| 2848 {expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1} | |
| 2849 {expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2} | |
| 856 | 2850 {expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737* |
| 102 | 2851 When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed. |
| 2852 | |
| 2853 {expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary | |
| 2854 make a copy of {expr1} first. | |
| 2855 {expr2} remains unchanged. | |
| 2856 Returns {expr1}. | |
| 2857 | |
| 79 | 2858 |
| 842 | 2859 feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()* |
| 2860 Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they | |
| 1621 | 2861 come from a mapping or were typed by the user. They are added |
| 1156 | 2862 to the end of the typeahead buffer, thus if a mapping is still |
| 842 | 2863 being executed these characters come after them. |
| 2864 The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in | |
| 2865 {string}. | |
| 2866 To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes | |
| 2867 and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example, | |
| 1215 | 2868 feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But |
| 842 | 2869 feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters. |
| 2870 If {mode} is absent, keys are remapped. | |
| 2871 {mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags: | |
| 843 | 2872 'm' Remap keys. This is default. |
| 2873 'n' Do not remap keys. | |
| 2874 't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as | |
| 2875 if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo, | |
| 2876 opening folds, etc. | |
| 842 | 2877 Return value is always 0. |
| 2878 | |
| 7 | 2879 filereadable({file}) *filereadable()* |
| 2880 The result is a Number, which is TRUE when a file with the | |
| 2881 name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist, | |
| 2882 or is a directory, the result is FALSE. {file} is any | |
| 2883 expression, which is used as a String. | |
| 1156 | 2884 If you don't care about the file being readable you can use |
| 2885 |glob()|. | |
| 7 | 2886 *file_readable()* |
| 2887 Obsolete name: file_readable(). | |
| 2888 | |
| 95 | 2889 |
| 1156 | 2890 filewritable({file}) *filewritable()* |
| 2891 The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the | |
| 2892 name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't | |
| 1621 | 2893 exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a |
| 1156 | 2894 directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2. |
| 2895 | |
| 2896 | |
| 102 | 2897 filter({expr}, {string}) *filter()* |
| 685 | 2898 {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. |
| 102 | 2899 For each item in {expr} evaluate {string} and when the result |
| 685 | 2900 is zero remove the item from the |List| or |Dictionary|. |
| 102 | 2901 Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item. |
| 685 | 2902 For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item. |
| 102 | 2903 Examples: > |
| 2904 :call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"') | |
| 2905 < Removes the items where "OLD" appears. > | |
| 2906 :call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8') | |
| 2907 < Removes the items with a key below 8. > | |
| 2908 :call filter(var, 0) | |
| 685 | 2909 < Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|. |
| 99 | 2910 |
| 102 | 2911 Note that {string} is the result of expression and is then |
| 2912 used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a | |
| 2913 |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. | |
| 2914 | |
| 685 | 2915 The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or |
| 2916 |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 650 | 2917 :let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"') |
| 102 | 2918 |
| 685 | 2919 < Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered. |
| 648 | 2920 When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no |
| 2921 further items in {expr} are processed. | |
| 95 | 2922 |
| 2923 | |
| 19 | 2924 finddir({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *finddir()* |
| 1095 | 2925 Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and |
| 2926 upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching| | |
| 2927 for the syntax of {path}. | |
| 2928 Returns the path of the first found match. When the found | |
| 2929 directory is below the current directory a relative path is | |
| 2930 returned. Otherwise a full path is returned. | |
| 19 | 2931 If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used. |
| 2932 If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of | |
| 794 | 2933 {name} in {path} instead of the first one. |
| 809 | 2934 When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|. |
| 19 | 2935 This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|. |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2936 {only available when compiled with the |+file_in_path| |
|
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2937 feature} |
| 794 | 2938 |
| 2939 findfile({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *findfile()* | |
| 2940 Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory. | |
| 2941 Uses 'suffixesadd'. | |
| 19 | 2942 Example: > |
| 2943 :echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;") | |
| 1156 | 2944 < Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until |
| 2945 it finds the file "tags.vim". | |
| 7 | 2946 |
| 1621 | 2947 float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()* |
| 2948 Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the | |
| 2949 decimal point. | |
| 2950 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a Number. | |
| 2951 When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the | |
| 2952 result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff. NaN results | |
| 2953 in -0x80000000. | |
| 2954 Examples: > | |
| 2955 echo float2nr(3.95) | |
| 2956 < 3 > | |
| 2957 echo float2nr(-23.45) | |
| 2958 < -23 > | |
| 2959 echo float2nr(1.0e100) | |
| 2960 < 2147483647 > | |
| 2961 echo float2nr(-1.0e150) | |
| 2962 < -2147483647 > | |
| 2963 echo float2nr(1.0e-100) | |
| 2964 < 0 | |
| 2965 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2966 | |
| 2967 | |
| 2968 floor({expr}) *floor()* | |
| 2969 Return the largest integral value less than or equal to | |
| 2970 {expr} as a |Float| (round down). | |
| 2971 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2972 Examples: > | |
| 2973 echo floor(1.856) | |
| 2974 < 1.0 > | |
| 2975 echo floor(-5.456) | |
| 2976 < -6.0 > | |
| 2977 echo floor(4.0) | |
| 2978 < 4.0 | |
| 2979 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2980 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2981 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2982 fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) *fmod()* |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2983 Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2984 division is not representable. Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2} |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2985 for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2986 result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2987 the magnitude of {expr2}. If {expr2} is zero, the value |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2988 returned is zero. The value returned is a |Float|. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2989 {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2990 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2991 :echo fmod(12.33, 1.22) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2992 < 0.13 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2993 :echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2994 < -0.13 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2995 {only available when compiled with |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2996 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2997 |
| 1586 | 2998 fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()* |
| 1621 | 2999 Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All |
| 1586 | 3000 characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|' |
| 3001 are escaped with a backslash. | |
| 1621 | 3002 For most systems the characters escaped are |
| 3003 " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash | |
| 3004 appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'. | |
| 1700 | 3005 A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit| |
| 3006 and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|). | |
| 1586 | 3007 Example: > |
| 1700 | 3008 :let fname = '+some str%nge|name' |
| 1586 | 3009 :exe "edit " . fnameescape(fname) |
| 3010 < results in executing: > | |
| 1700 | 3011 edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name |
| 1586 | 3012 |
| 7 | 3013 fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()* |
| 3014 Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a | |
| 3015 string of characters like it is used for file names on the | |
| 3016 command line. See |filename-modifiers|. | |
| 3017 Example: > | |
| 3018 :echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h") | |
| 3019 < results in: > | |
| 3020 /home/mool/vim/vim/src | |
| 1621 | 3021 < Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use |
| 7 | 3022 |expand()| first then. |
| 3023 | |
| 3024 foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()* | |
| 3025 The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed | |
| 3026 fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold. | |
| 3027 If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. | |
| 3028 | |
| 3029 foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()* | |
| 3030 The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed | |
| 3031 fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold. | |
| 3032 If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. | |
| 3033 | |
| 3034 foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()* | |
| 3035 The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum} | |
| 1621 | 3036 in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is |
| 7 | 3037 returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is |
| 3038 returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed. | |
| 3039 When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is | |
| 3040 returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the | |
| 3041 foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the | |
| 3042 previous line is usually available. | |
| 3043 | |
| 3044 *foldtext()* | |
| 3045 foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is | |
| 3046 the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should | |
| 3047 only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the | |
| 3048 |v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables. | |
| 3049 The returned string looks like this: > | |
| 3050 +-- 45 lines: abcdef | |
| 1621 | 3051 < The number of dashes depends on the foldlevel. The "45" is |
| 7 | 3052 the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text in the |
| 3053 first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space, "//" | |
| 3054 or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and 'commentstring' | |
| 3055 options is removed. | |
| 3056 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} | |
| 3057 | |
| 29 | 3058 foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()* |
| 3059 Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line | |
| 3060 {lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context. | |
| 3061 When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is | |
| 3062 returned. | |
| 3063 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current | |
| 3064 line, "'m" mark m, etc. | |
| 3065 Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML. | |
| 3066 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} | |
| 3067 | |
| 7 | 3068 *foreground()* |
| 1621 | 3069 foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from |
| 7 | 3070 a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()| |
| 3071 On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always | |
| 3072 allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use | |
| 3073 |remote_foreground()| instead. | |
| 3074 {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the | |
| 3075 Win32 console version} | |
| 3076 | |
| 82 | 3077 |
| 85 | 3078 function({name}) *function()* *E700* |
| 685 | 3079 Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}. |
| 55 | 3080 {name} can be a user defined function or an internal function. |
| 3081 | |
| 82 | 3082 |
| 3224 | 3083 garbagecollect([{atexit}]) *garbagecollect()* |
| 692 | 3084 Cleanup unused |Lists| and |Dictionaries| that have circular |
| 370 | 3085 references. There is hardly ever a need to invoke this |
| 3086 function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of | |
| 3087 memory or is waiting for the user to press a key after | |
| 3088 'updatetime'. Items without circular references are always | |
| 3089 freed when they become unused. | |
| 685 | 3090 This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or |
| 3091 |Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs | |
| 3092 for a long time. | |
| 3224 | 3093 When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage |
| 1405 | 3094 collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't |
| 3095 done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks. | |
| 370 | 3096 |
| 140 | 3097 get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()* |
| 685 | 3098 Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not |
| 82 | 3099 available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is |
| 3100 omitted. | |
| 102 | 3101 get({dict}, {key} [, {default}]) |
| 685 | 3102 Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this |
| 102 | 3103 item is not available return {default}. Return zero when |
| 3104 {default} is omitted. | |
| 3105 | |
| 435 | 3106 *getbufline()* |
| 3107 getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}]) | |
| 685 | 3108 Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end} |
| 3109 (inclusive) in the buffer {expr}. If {end} is omitted, a | |
| 3110 |List| with only the line {lnum} is returned. | |
| 435 | 3111 |
| 3112 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. | |
| 3113 | |
| 448 | 3114 For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the |
| 3115 buffer. Otherwise a number must be used. | |
| 435 | 3116 |
| 3117 When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of | |
| 685 | 3118 lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned. |
| 435 | 3119 |
| 3120 When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, | |
| 3121 it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the | |
| 685 | 3122 buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is |
| 435 | 3123 returned. |
| 3124 | |
| 448 | 3125 This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and |
| 685 | 3126 non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned. |
| 435 | 3127 |
| 3128 Example: > | |
| 3129 :let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$") | |
| 82 | 3130 |
| 3131 getbufvar({expr}, {varname}) *getbufvar()* | |
| 3132 The result is the value of option or local buffer variable | |
| 3133 {varname} in buffer {expr}. Note that the name without "b:" | |
| 3134 must be used. | |
| 1668 | 3135 When {varname} is empty returns a dictionary with all the |
| 3136 buffer-local variables. | |
| 216 | 3137 This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it |
| 3138 doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or | |
| 3139 window-local option. | |
| 82 | 3140 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. |
| 3141 When the buffer or variable doesn't exist an empty string is | |
| 3142 returned, there is no error message. | |
| 3143 Examples: > | |
| 3144 :let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod") | |
| 3145 :echo "todo myvar = " . getbufvar("todo", "myvar") | |
| 3146 < | |
| 7 | 3147 getchar([expr]) *getchar()* |
| 867 | 3148 Get a single character from the user or input stream. |
| 7 | 3149 If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available. |
| 3150 If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available. | |
| 867 | 3151 Return zero otherwise. |
| 7 | 3152 If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is |
| 867 | 3153 not consumed. Return zero if no character available. |
| 3154 | |
| 3155 Without {expr} and when {expr} is 0 a whole character or | |
| 3156 special key is returned. If it is an 8-bit character, the | |
| 3157 result is a number. Use nr2char() to convert it to a String. | |
| 3158 Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character. | |
| 3159 For a special key it's a sequence of bytes starting with 0x80 | |
| 872 | 3160 (decimal: 128). This is the same value as the string |
| 3161 "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is also a | |
| 3162 String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is | |
| 3163 not included in the character. | |
| 867 | 3164 |
| 3165 When {expr} is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a | |
| 872 | 3166 one-byte character it is the character itself as a number. |
| 3167 Use nr2char() to convert it to a String. | |
| 867 | 3168 |
| 3224 | 3169 Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers. |
| 3170 | |
| 1029 | 3171 When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be |
| 3172 returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|, | |
| 3173 |v:mouse_lnum| and |v:mouse_win|. This example positions the | |
| 3174 mouse as it would normally happen: > | |
| 3175 let c = getchar() | |
| 1621 | 3176 if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0 |
| 1029 | 3177 exe v:mouse_win . "wincmd w" |
| 3178 exe v:mouse_lnum | |
| 3179 exe "normal " . v:mouse_col . "|" | |
| 3180 endif | |
| 3181 < | |
| 7 | 3182 There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the |
| 3183 user that a character has to be typed. | |
| 3184 There is no mapping for the character. | |
| 3185 Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del> | |
| 3186 key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character | |
| 3187 sequence. Examples: > | |
| 3188 getchar() == "\<Del>" | |
| 3189 getchar() == "\<S-Left>" | |
| 3190 < This example redefines "f" to ignore case: > | |
| 3191 :nmap f :call FindChar()<CR> | |
| 3192 :function FindChar() | |
| 3193 : let c = nr2char(getchar()) | |
| 3194 : while col('.') < col('$') - 1 | |
| 3195 : normal l | |
| 3196 : if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c | |
| 3197 : break | |
| 3198 : endif | |
| 3199 : endwhile | |
| 3200 :endfunction | |
| 3201 | |
| 3202 getcharmod() *getcharmod()* | |
| 3203 The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for | |
| 3204 the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way. | |
| 3205 These values are added together: | |
| 3206 2 shift | |
| 3207 4 control | |
| 3208 8 alt (meta) | |
| 3224 | 3209 16 meta (when it's different from ALT) |
| 3210 32 mouse double click | |
| 3211 64 mouse triple click | |
| 3212 96 mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64) | |
| 3213 128 command (Macintosh only) | |
| 7 | 3214 Only the modifiers that have not been included in the |
| 1621 | 3215 character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A" |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3216 without a modifier. |
| 7 | 3217 |
| 3218 getcmdline() *getcmdline()* | |
| 3219 Return the current command-line. Only works when the command | |
| 3220 line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or | |
| 3221 |c_CTRL-R_=|. | |
| 3222 Example: > | |
| 3223 :cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR> | |
| 531 | 3224 < Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()| and |setcmdpos()|. |
| 7 | 3225 |
| 95 | 3226 getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()* |
| 7 | 3227 Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a |
| 3228 byte count. The first column is 1. | |
| 3229 Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of | |
| 3230 |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Returns 0 otherwise. | |
| 531 | 3231 Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|. |
| 3232 | |
| 3233 getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()* | |
| 3234 Return the current command-line type. Possible return values | |
| 3235 are: | |
| 532 | 3236 : normal Ex command |
| 3237 > debug mode command |debug-mode| | |
| 3238 / forward search command | |
| 3239 ? backward search command | |
| 3240 @ |input()| command | |
| 3241 - |:insert| or |:append| command | |
| 531 | 3242 Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of |
| 3243 |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Returns an empty string | |
| 3244 otherwise. | |
| 3245 Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|. | |
| 7 | 3246 |
| 3247 *getcwd()* | |
| 3248 getcwd() The result is a String, which is the name of the current | |
| 3249 working directory. | |
| 3250 | |
| 3251 getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()* | |
| 3252 The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the | |
| 3253 given file {fname}. | |
| 3254 If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned. | |
| 3255 If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned. | |
| 1293 | 3256 If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2 |
| 3257 is returned. | |
| 7 | 3258 |
| 37 | 3259 getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()* |
| 3260 Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being | |
| 3261 used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group | |
| 3262 |hl-Normal|. | |
| 3263 With an argument a check is done whether {name} is a valid | |
| 3264 font name. If not then an empty string is returned. | |
| 3265 Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the | |
| 3266 GUI does not support obtaining the real name. | |
| 824 | 3267 Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or |
| 819 | 3268 gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this |
| 3269 function just after the GUI has started. | |
| 37 | 3270 Note that the GTK 2 GUI accepts any font name, thus checking |
| 3271 for a valid name does not work. | |
| 3272 | |
| 20 | 3273 getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()* |
| 3274 The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute | |
| 3275 permissions of the given file {fname}. | |
| 3276 If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an | |
| 3277 empty string is returned. | |
| 3278 The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of | |
| 3279 "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner | |
| 3280 of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users. | |
| 3281 If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this | |
| 3282 is replaced with the string "-". Example: > | |
| 3283 :echo getfperm("/etc/passwd") | |
| 3284 < This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display | |
| 3285 the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------". | |
| 205 | 3286 |
| 7 | 3287 getftime({fname}) *getftime()* |
| 3288 The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of | |
| 3289 the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds | |
| 3290 since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also | |
| 3291 |localtime()| and |strftime()|. | |
| 3292 If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned. | |
| 3293 | |
| 20 | 3294 getftype({fname}) *getftype()* |
| 3295 The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of | |
| 3296 file of the given file {fname}. | |
| 3297 If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned. | |
| 3298 Here is a table over different kinds of files and their | |
| 3299 results: | |
| 3300 Normal file "file" | |
| 3301 Directory "dir" | |
| 3302 Symbolic link "link" | |
| 3303 Block device "bdev" | |
| 3304 Character device "cdev" | |
| 3305 Socket "socket" | |
| 3306 FIFO "fifo" | |
| 3307 All other "other" | |
| 3308 Example: > | |
| 3309 getftype("/home") | |
| 3310 < Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on | |
| 3311 systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and | |
| 3312 "file" are returned. | |
| 3313 | |
| 7 | 3314 *getline()* |
| 82 | 3315 getline({lnum} [, {end}]) |
| 3316 Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum} | |
| 3317 from the current buffer. Example: > | |
| 7 | 3318 getline(1) |
| 3319 < When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a | |
| 3320 digit, line() is called to translate the String into a Number. | |
| 3321 To get the line under the cursor: > | |
| 3322 getline(".") | |
| 3323 < When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of | |
| 3324 lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned. | |
| 3325 | |
| 685 | 3326 When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is |
| 3327 a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end}, | |
| 82 | 3328 including line {end}. |
| 3329 {end} is used in the same way as {lnum}. | |
| 3330 Non-existing lines are silently omitted. | |
| 685 | 3331 When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned. |
| 82 | 3332 Example: > |
| 3333 :let start = line('.') | |
| 3334 :let end = search("^$") - 1 | |
| 3335 :let lines = getline(start, end) | |
| 3336 | |
| 1156 | 3337 < To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()| |
| 3338 | |
| 647 | 3339 getloclist({nr}) *getloclist()* |
| 3340 Returns a list with all the entries in the location list for | |
| 3341 window {nr}. When {nr} is zero the current window is used. | |
| 3342 For a location list window, the displayed location list is | |
| 648 | 3343 returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3344 returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|. |
| 82 | 3345 |
| 1326 | 3346 getmatches() *getmatches()* |
| 3347 Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined by | |
| 3348 |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. |getmatches()| is | |
| 3349 useful in combination with |setmatches()|, as |setmatches()| | |
| 3350 can restore a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. | |
| 3351 Example: > | |
| 3352 :echo getmatches() | |
| 3353 < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', | |
| 3354 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', | |
| 3355 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > | |
| 3356 :let m = getmatches() | |
| 3357 :call clearmatches() | |
| 3358 :echo getmatches() | |
| 3359 < [] > | |
| 3360 :call setmatches(m) | |
| 3361 :echo getmatches() | |
| 3362 < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', | |
| 3363 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', | |
| 3364 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > | |
| 3365 :unlet m | |
| 3366 < | |
| 3367 | |
| 230 | 3368 getqflist() *getqflist()* |
| 3369 Returns a list with all the current quickfix errors. Each | |
| 3370 list item is a dictionary with these entries: | |
| 3371 bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use | |
| 3372 bufname() to get the name | |
| 3373 lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1) | |
| 3374 col column number (first column is 1) | |
| 233 | 3375 vcol non-zero: "col" is visual column |
| 3376 zero: "col" is byte index | |
| 230 | 3377 nr error number |
| 1065 | 3378 pattern search pattern used to locate the error |
| 230 | 3379 text description of the error |
| 3380 type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc. | |
| 3381 valid non-zero: recognized error message | |
| 3382 | |
| 515 | 3383 When there is no error list or it's empty an empty list is |
| 1065 | 3384 returned. Quickfix list entries with non-existing buffer |
| 3385 number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero. | |
| 515 | 3386 |
| 230 | 3387 Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and |
| 3388 do something with them: > | |
| 3389 :vimgrep /theword/jg *.c | |
| 3390 :for d in getqflist() | |
| 3391 : echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text | |
| 3392 :endfor | |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 | |
| 282 | 3395 getreg([{regname} [, 1]]) *getreg()* |
| 7 | 3396 The result is a String, which is the contents of register |
| 236 | 3397 {regname}. Example: > |
| 7 | 3398 :let cliptext = getreg('*') |
| 3399 < getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression | |
| 236 | 3400 register. (For use in maps.) |
| 282 | 3401 getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can |
| 3402 be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra | |
| 3403 argument is ignored, thus you can always give it. | |
| 7 | 3404 If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. |
| 3405 | |
| 82 | 3406 |
| 7 | 3407 getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()* |
| 3408 The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}. | |
| 3409 The value will be one of: | |
| 3410 "v" for |characterwise| text | |
| 3411 "V" for |linewise| text | |
| 3412 "<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text | |
| 3413 0 for an empty or unknown register | |
| 3414 <CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16. | |
| 3415 If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. | |
| 3416 | |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3417 gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname}) *gettabvar()* |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3418 Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3419 {tabnr}. |t:var| |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3420 Tabs are numbered starting with one. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3421 Note that the name without "t:" must be used. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3422 |
| 831 | 3423 gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}) *gettabwinvar()* |
| 1156 | 3424 Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window |
| 3425 {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}. | |
| 3426 When {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a window-local | |
| 3427 option. | |
| 831 | 3428 Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage |
| 3429 use |getwinvar()|. | |
| 3430 When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. | |
| 3431 This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and | |
| 3432 window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable | |
| 3433 or buffer-local variable. | |
| 1156 | 3434 When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all window-local |
| 3435 variables is returned. | |
| 3436 Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:". | |
| 831 | 3437 Examples: > |
| 3438 :let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list') | |
| 3439 :echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar') | |
| 1266 | 3440 < |
| 7 | 3441 *getwinposx()* |
| 3442 getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of | |
| 3443 the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. The result will be | |
| 3444 -1 if the information is not available. | |
| 3445 | |
| 3446 *getwinposy()* | |
| 3447 getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of | |
| 1621 | 3448 the top of the GUI Vim window. The result will be -1 if the |
| 7 | 3449 information is not available. |
| 3450 | |
| 831 | 3451 getwinvar({winnr}, {varname}) *getwinvar()* |
| 3452 Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage. | |
| 7 | 3453 Examples: > |
| 3454 :let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list') | |
| 3455 :echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar') | |
| 3456 < | |
| 1754 | 3457 glob({expr} [, {flag}]) *glob()* |
| 3458 Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the | |
| 1156 | 3459 use of special characters. |
| 3460 The result is a String. | |
| 7 | 3461 When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL> |
| 3462 characters. | |
| 1754 | 3463 Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero, |
| 3464 the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching | |
| 3465 one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and | |
| 3466 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. | |
| 2662 | 3467 'wildignorecase' always applies. |
| 7 | 3468 If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. |
| 3469 A name for a non-existing file is not included. | |
| 3470 | |
| 3471 For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from | |
| 3472 any external command. Example: > | |
| 3473 :let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`") | |
| 3474 :let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g") | |
| 3475 < The result of the program inside the backticks should be one | |
| 1621 | 3476 item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed. |
| 7 | 3477 |
| 3478 See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See | |
| 3479 |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command. | |
| 3480 | |
| 1754 | 3481 globpath({path}, {expr} [, {flag}]) *globpath()* |
| 7 | 3482 Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate |
| 3483 the results. Example: > | |
| 3484 :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim") | |
| 3485 < {path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each | |
| 3486 directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with | |
| 1754 | 3487 |glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed. |
| 7 | 3488 To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a |
| 3489 backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a | |
| 3490 trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it. | |
| 3491 If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no | |
| 3492 error message. | |
| 1754 | 3493 Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero, |
| 3494 the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching | |
| 3495 one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and | |
| 3496 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. | |
| 7 | 3497 |
| 444 | 3498 The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree. |
| 3499 For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories | |
| 3500 in 'runtimepath' and below: > | |
| 3501 :echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt") | |
| 1668 | 3502 < Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not |
| 3503 supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly. | |
| 3504 | |
| 7 | 3505 *has()* |
| 3506 has({feature}) The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is | |
| 3507 supported, zero otherwise. The {feature} argument is a | |
| 3508 string. See |feature-list| below. | |
| 3509 Also see |exists()|. | |
| 3510 | |
| 102 | 3511 |
| 3512 has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()* | |
| 685 | 3513 The result is a Number, which is 1 if |Dictionary| {dict} has |
| 3514 an entry with key {key}. Zero otherwise. | |
| 102 | 3515 |
| 1104 | 3516 haslocaldir() *haslocaldir()* |
| 3517 The result is a Number, which is 1 when the current | |
| 1621 | 3518 window has set a local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise. |
| 102 | 3519 |
| 782 | 3520 hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()* |
| 7 | 3521 The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that |
| 3522 contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to) | |
| 3523 and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by | |
| 3524 {mode}. | |
| 782 | 3525 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations |
| 786 | 3526 instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or |
| 3527 Command-line mode. | |
| 7 | 3528 Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current |
| 3529 buffer are checked for a match. | |
| 3530 If no matching mapping is found 0 is returned. | |
| 3531 The following characters are recognized in {mode}: | |
| 3532 n Normal mode | |
| 3533 v Visual mode | |
| 3534 o Operator-pending mode | |
| 3535 i Insert mode | |
| 3536 l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.) | |
| 3537 c Command-line mode | |
| 3538 When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used. | |
| 3539 | |
| 3540 This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists | |
| 1621 | 3541 to a function in a Vim script. Example: > |
| 7 | 3542 :if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit') |
| 3543 : map <Leader>d \ABCdoit | |
| 3544 :endif | |
| 3545 < This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't | |
| 3546 already a mapping to "\ABCdoit". | |
| 3547 | |
| 3548 histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()* | |
| 3549 Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be | |
| 3550 one of: *hist-names* | |
| 3551 "cmd" or ":" command line history | |
| 3552 "search" or "/" search pattern history | |
| 1621 | 3553 "expr" or "=" typed expression history |
| 7 | 3554 "input" or "@" input line history |
| 3555 If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be | |
| 3556 shifted to become the newest entry. | |
| 3557 The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful, | |
| 3558 otherwise 0 is returned. | |
| 3559 | |
| 3560 Example: > | |
| 3561 :call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d")) | |
| 3562 :let date=input("Enter date: ") | |
| 3563 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 3564 | |
| 3565 histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()* | |
| 236 | 3566 Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names| |
| 7 | 3567 for the possible values of {history}. |
| 3568 | |
| 1668 | 3569 If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a |
| 3570 regular expression. All entries matching that expression will | |
| 3571 be removed from the history (if there are any). | |
| 7 | 3572 Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|. |
| 1668 | 3573 If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as |
| 3574 an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will | |
| 3575 be removed if it exists. | |
| 7 | 3576 |
| 3577 The result is a Number: 1 for a successful operation, | |
| 3578 otherwise 0 is returned. | |
| 3579 | |
| 3580 Examples: | |
| 3581 Clear expression register history: > | |
| 3582 :call histdel("expr") | |
| 3583 < | |
| 3584 Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: > | |
| 3585 :call histdel("/", '^\*') | |
| 3586 < | |
| 3587 The following three are equivalent: > | |
| 3588 :call histdel("search", histnr("search")) | |
| 3589 :call histdel("search", -1) | |
| 3590 :call histdel("search", '^'.histget("search", -1).'$') | |
| 3591 < | |
| 3592 To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for | |
| 3593 the "n" command and 'hlsearch': > | |
| 3594 :call histdel("search", -1) | |
| 3595 :let @/ = histget("search", -1) | |
| 3596 | |
| 3597 histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()* | |
| 3598 The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from | |
| 3599 {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of | |
| 3600 {history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is | |
| 3601 no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is | |
| 3602 omitted, the most recent item from the history is used. | |
| 3603 | |
| 3604 Examples: | |
| 3605 Redo the second last search from history. > | |
| 3606 :execute '/' . histget("search", -2) | |
| 3607 | |
| 3608 < Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of | |
| 3609 the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. > | |
| 3610 :command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>) | |
| 3611 < | |
| 3612 histnr({history}) *histnr()* | |
| 3613 The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}. | |
| 3614 See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}. | |
| 3615 If an error occurred, -1 is returned. | |
| 3616 | |
| 3617 Example: > | |
| 3618 :let inp_index = histnr("expr") | |
| 3619 < | |
| 3620 hlexists({name}) *hlexists()* | |
| 3621 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a highlight group | |
| 3622 called {name} exists. This is when the group has been | |
| 3623 defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has | |
| 3624 been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax | |
| 3625 item. | |
| 3626 *highlight_exists()* | |
| 3627 Obsolete name: highlight_exists(). | |
| 3628 | |
| 3629 *hlID()* | |
| 3630 hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group | |
| 3631 with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist, | |
| 3632 zero is returned. | |
| 3633 This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight | |
| 1621 | 3634 group. For example, to get the background color of the |
| 7 | 3635 "Comment" group: > |
| 3636 :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg") | |
| 3637 < *highlightID()* | |
| 3638 Obsolete name: highlightID(). | |
| 3639 | |
| 3640 hostname() *hostname()* | |
| 3641 The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on | |
| 236 | 3642 which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than |
| 7 | 3643 256 characters long are truncated. |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()* | |
| 3646 The result is a String, which is the text {expr} converted | |
| 3647 from encoding {from} to encoding {to}. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3648 When the conversion completely fails an empty string is |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3649 returned. When some characters could not be converted they |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3650 are replaced with "?". |
| 7 | 3651 The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function |
| 3652 can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv". | |
| 3653 Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv| | |
| 3654 feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back | |
| 3655 can be done. | |
| 3656 This can be used to display messages with special characters, | |
| 3657 no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in | |
| 3658 UTF-8 and use: > | |
| 3659 echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc) | |
| 3660 < Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion | |
| 3661 from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You | |
| 3662 cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
3663 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} |
| 7 | 3664 |
| 3665 *indent()* | |
| 3666 indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the | |
| 3667 current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value | |
| 3668 of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in | |
| 3669 |getline()|. | |
| 3670 When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. | |
| 3671 | |
| 79 | 3672 |
| 95 | 3673 index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()* |
| 685 | 3674 Return the lowest index in |List| {list} where the item has a |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3675 value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic conversion, so |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3676 the String "4" is different from the Number 4. And the number |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3677 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value of 'ignorecase' |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3678 is not used here, case always matters. |
| 153 | 3679 If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index |
| 3680 {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end). | |
| 79 | 3681 When {ic} is given and it is non-zero, ignore case. Otherwise |
| 3682 case must match. | |
| 3683 -1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {list}. | |
| 3684 Example: > | |
| 3685 :let idx = index(words, "the") | |
| 87 | 3686 :if index(numbers, 123) >= 0 |
| 79 | 3687 |
| 3688 | |
| 531 | 3689 input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* |
| 7 | 3690 The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3691 the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3692 string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3693 in the prompt to start a new line. |
| 531 | 3694 The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt. |
| 3695 The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same | |
| 1621 | 3696 editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history |
| 531 | 3697 for lines typed for input(). |
| 3698 Example: > | |
| 3699 :if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer" | |
| 3700 : echo "Cheers!" | |
| 3701 :endif | |
| 3702 < | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3703 If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3704 is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this. |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3705 Example: > |
| 531 | 3706 :let color = input("Color? ", "white") |
| 3707 | |
| 3708 < The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of | |
| 3709 completion supported for the input. Without it completion is | |
| 1621 | 3710 not performed. The supported completion types are the same as |
| 531 | 3711 that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the |
| 1621 | 3712 "-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for |
| 531 | 3713 more information. Example: > |
| 3714 let fname = input("File: ", "", "file") | |
| 3715 < | |
| 3716 NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for | |
| 3717 the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI). | |
| 7 | 3718 Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will |
| 3719 consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a | |
| 3720 mapping is handled like the characters were typed. | |
| 3721 Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()| | |
| 3722 after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid | |
| 3723 that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using | |
| 3724 |:execute| or |:normal|. | |
| 3725 | |
| 531 | 3726 Example with a mapping: > |
| 7 | 3727 :nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" . Foo<CR> |
| 3728 :function GetFoo() | |
| 3729 : call inputsave() | |
| 3730 : let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ") | |
| 3731 : call inputrestore() | |
| 3732 :endfunction | |
| 3733 | |
| 3734 inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()* | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3735 Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3736 are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text. |
| 7 | 3737 Example: > |
| 3738 :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", &sw) | |
| 3739 :if n != "" | |
| 3740 : let &sw = n | |
| 3741 :endif | |
| 3742 < When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When | |
| 3743 omitted an empty string is returned. | |
| 3744 Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting | |
| 3745 <Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button. | |
| 531 | 3746 NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. |
| 7 | 3747 |
| 519 | 3748 inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()* |
| 819 | 3749 {textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is |
| 3750 displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to | |
| 3751 enter a number, which is returned. | |
| 519 | 3752 The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the |
| 1621 | 3753 mouse. For the first string 0 is returned. When clicking |
| 519 | 3754 above the first item a negative number is returned. When |
| 3755 clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist} | |
| 3756 is returned. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3757 Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise |
| 1621 | 3758 it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at |
| 1156 | 3759 the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item. |
| 3760 Example: > | |
| 519 | 3761 let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red', |
| 3762 \ '2. green', '3. blue']) | |
| 3763 | |
| 7 | 3764 inputrestore() *inputrestore()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3765 Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|. |
| 7 | 3766 Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is |
| 3767 called. Calling it more often is harmless though. | |
| 3768 Returns 1 when there is nothing to restore, 0 otherwise. | |
| 3769 | |
| 3770 inputsave() *inputsave()* | |
| 3771 Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that | |
| 3772 a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be | |
| 3773 followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can | |
| 3774 be used several times, in which case there must be just as | |
| 3775 many inputrestore() calls. | |
| 3776 Returns 1 when out of memory, 0 otherwise. | |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()* | |
| 3779 This function acts much like the |input()| function with but | |
| 3780 two exceptions: | |
| 3781 a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of | |
| 3782 asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and | |
| 3783 b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input | |
| 3784 |history| stack. | |
| 3785 The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually | |
| 3786 typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt. | |
| 531 | 3787 NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. |
| 7 | 3788 |
| 55 | 3789 insert({list}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()* |
| 685 | 3790 Insert {item} at the start of |List| {list}. |
| 55 | 3791 If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index |
| 1621 | 3792 {idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just |
| 55 | 3793 like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see |
| 3794 |list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item. | |
| 685 | 3795 Returns the resulting |List|. Examples: > |
| 55 | 3796 :let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1) |
| 3797 :call insert(mylist, 4, -1) | |
| 3798 :call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist)) | |
| 82 | 3799 < The last example can be done simpler with |add()|. |
| 685 | 3800 Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single |
| 692 | 3801 item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. |
| 55 | 3802 |
| 3214 | 3803 invert({expr}) *invert()* |
| 3804 Bitwise invert. The argument is converted to a number. A | |
| 3805 List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Example: > | |
| 3806 :let bits = invert(bits) | |
| 3807 | |
| 7 | 3808 isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()* |
| 3809 The result is a Number, which is non-zero when a directory | |
| 3810 with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't | |
| 3811 exist, or isn't a directory, the result is FALSE. {directory} | |
| 3812 is any expression, which is used as a String. | |
| 3813 | |
| 819 | 3814 islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786* |
| 148 | 3815 The result is a Number, which is non-zero when {expr} is the |
| 3816 name of a locked variable. | |
| 685 | 3817 {expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or |
| 3818 |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself! Example: > | |
| 148 | 3819 :let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3] |
| 3820 :lockvar 1 alist | |
| 3821 :echo islocked('alist') " 1 | |
| 3822 :echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0 | |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 < When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error | |
| 843 | 3825 message. Use |exists()| to check for existence. |
| 148 | 3826 |
| 140 | 3827 items({dict}) *items()* |
| 685 | 3828 Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each |
| 3829 |List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict} | |
| 3830 entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary | |
| 3831 order. | |
| 140 | 3832 |
| 95 | 3833 |
| 3834 join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()* | |
| 3835 Join the items in {list} together into one String. | |
| 3836 When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If | |
| 3837 {sep} is omitted a single space is used. | |
| 3838 Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to | |
| 3839 add it there too: > | |
| 3840 let lines = join(mylist, "\n") . "\n" | |
| 692 | 3841 < String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are |
| 95 | 3842 converted into a string like with |string()|. |
| 3843 The opposite function is |split()|. | |
| 3844 | |
| 99 | 3845 keys({dict}) *keys()* |
| 685 | 3846 Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in |
| 99 | 3847 arbitrary order. |
| 3848 | |
| 85 | 3849 *len()* *E701* |
| 55 | 3850 len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument. |
| 3851 When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is | |
| 3852 used, as with |strlen()|. | |
| 685 | 3853 When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is |
| 55 | 3854 returned. |
| 685 | 3855 When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the |
| 3856 |Dictionary| is returned. | |
| 55 | 3857 Otherwise an error is given. |
| 3858 | |
| 7 | 3859 *libcall()* *E364* *E368* |
| 3860 libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) | |
| 3861 Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname} | |
| 3862 with single argument {argument}. | |
| 3863 This is useful to call functions in a library that you | |
| 3864 especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument | |
| 3865 is possible, calling standard library functions is rather | |
| 3866 limited. | |
| 3867 The result is the String returned by the function. If the | |
| 3868 function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string "" | |
| 3869 to Vim. | |
| 3870 If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()! | |
| 3871 If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an | |
| 3872 int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a | |
| 3873 null-terminated string. | |
| 3874 This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. | |
| 3875 | |
| 3876 libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to | |
| 3877 Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a | |
| 3878 means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will | |
| 3879 very probably crash. | |
| 3880 | |
| 3881 For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL | |
| 3882 and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is | |
| 3883 used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly | |
| 3884 one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer, | |
| 3885 and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character | |
| 3886 pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid | |
| 3887 after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the | |
| 3888 DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will | |
| 3889 leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work, | |
| 3890 it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded. | |
| 3891 | |
| 3892 WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may | |
| 1621 | 3893 crash! This also happens if the function returns a number, |
| 7 | 3894 because Vim thinks it's a pointer. |
| 3895 For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL | |
| 3896 without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if | |
| 3897 the DLL is not in the usual places. | |
| 3898 For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the | |
| 3899 object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC'). | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3900 {only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| |
| 7 | 3901 feature is present} |
| 3902 Examples: > | |
| 3903 :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME") | |
| 3904 < | |
| 3905 *libcallnr()* | |
| 3906 libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3907 Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an |
| 7 | 3908 int instead of a string. |
| 3909 {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| | |
| 3910 feature is present} | |
| 1621 | 3911 Examples: > |
| 3912 :echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "") | |
| 7 | 3913 :call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n") |
| 3914 :call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10) | |
| 3915 < | |
| 3916 *line()* | |
| 3917 line({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file | |
| 3918 position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are: | |
| 3919 . the cursor position | |
| 3920 $ the last line in the current buffer | |
| 3921 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is | |
| 3922 returned) | |
| 665 | 3923 w0 first line visible in current window |
| 3924 w$ last line visible in current window | |
| 1609 | 3925 v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the |
| 3926 cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode | |
| 3927 returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in | |
| 3928 that it's updated right away. | |
| 1156 | 3929 Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number |
| 3930 then applies to another buffer. | |
| 703 | 3931 To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use |
| 3932 |getpos()|. | |
| 7 | 3933 Examples: > |
| 3934 line(".") line number of the cursor | |
| 3935 line("'t") line number of mark t | |
| 3936 line("'" . marker) line number of mark marker | |
| 3937 < *last-position-jump* | |
| 3938 This autocommand jumps to the last known position in a file | |
| 3939 just after opening it, if the '" mark is set: > | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3940 :au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g`\"" | endif |
| 9 | 3941 |
| 7 | 3942 line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()* |
| 3943 Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line | |
| 3944 {lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on | |
| 3945 the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first | |
| 3237 | 3946 line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored. |
| 7 | 3947 This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just |
| 3948 below the last line: > | |
| 3949 line2byte(line("$") + 1) | |
| 3237 | 3950 < This is the buffer size plus one. If 'fileencoding' is empty |
| 3951 it is the file size plus one. | |
| 7 | 3952 When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been |
| 3953 disabled at compile time, -1 is returned. | |
| 3954 Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|. | |
| 3955 | |
| 3956 lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()* | |
| 3957 Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp | |
| 3958 indenting rules, as with 'lisp'. | |
| 3959 The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is | |
| 3960 relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. | |
| 3961 When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the | |
| 3962 |+lispindent| feature, -1 is returned. | |
| 3963 | |
| 3964 localtime() *localtime()* | |
| 3965 Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan | |
| 3966 1970. See also |strftime()| and |getftime()|. | |
| 3967 | |
| 95 | 3968 |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3969 log({expr}) *log()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
3970 Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
3971 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3972 (0, inf]. |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3973 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3974 :echo log(10) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3975 < 2.302585 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3976 :echo log(exp(5)) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3977 < 5.0 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
3978 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3979 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3980 |
| 1621 | 3981 log10({expr}) *log10()* |
| 3982 Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|. | |
| 3983 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 3984 Examples: > | |
| 3985 :echo log10(1000) | |
| 3986 < 3.0 > | |
| 3987 :echo log10(0.01) | |
| 3988 < -2.0 | |
| 3989 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 3990 | |
| 102 | 3991 map({expr}, {string}) *map()* |
| 685 | 3992 {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. |
| 102 | 3993 Replace each item in {expr} with the result of evaluating |
| 3994 {string}. | |
| 3995 Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item. | |
| 1998 | 3996 For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item |
| 3997 and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of the current item. | |
| 102 | 3998 Example: > |
| 3999 :call map(mylist, '"> " . v:val . " <"') | |
| 95 | 4000 < This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist". |
| 102 | 4001 |
| 158 | 4002 Note that {string} is the result of an expression and is then |
| 102 | 4003 used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a |
| 158 | 4004 |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You |
| 4005 still have to double ' quotes | |
| 102 | 4006 |
| 685 | 4007 The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or |
| 4008 |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 99 | 4009 :let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' & . "\t"') |
| 102 | 4010 |
| 685 | 4011 < Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered. |
| 648 | 4012 When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no |
| 4013 further items in {expr} are processed. | |
| 95 | 4014 |
| 4015 | |
| 2610 | 4016 maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) *maparg()* |
| 4017 When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping | |
| 4018 {name} in mode {mode}. The returned String has special | |
| 4019 characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command | |
| 4020 listing. | |
| 4021 | |
| 4022 When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is | |
| 4023 returned. | |
| 4024 | |
| 4025 The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map" | |
| 4026 command. | |
| 4027 | |
| 644 | 4028 {mode} can be one of these strings: |
| 7 | 4029 "n" Normal |
| 2610 | 4030 "v" Visual (including Select) |
| 7 | 4031 "o" Operator-pending |
| 4032 "i" Insert | |
| 4033 "c" Cmd-line | |
| 2610 | 4034 "s" Select |
| 4035 "x" Visual | |
| 7 | 4036 "l" langmap |language-mapping| |
| 4037 "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending | |
| 644 | 4038 When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used. |
| 2610 | 4039 |
| 782 | 4040 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations |
| 4041 instead of mappings. | |
| 2610 | 4042 |
| 4043 When {dict} is there and it is non-zero return a dictionary | |
| 4044 containing all the information of the mapping with the | |
| 4045 following items: | |
| 4046 "lhs" The {lhs} of the mapping. | |
| 4047 "rhs" The {rhs} of the mapping as typed. | |
| 4048 "silent" 1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0. | |
| 2625 | 4049 "noremap" 1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable. |
| 2610 | 4050 "expr" 1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|). |
| 4051 "buffer" 1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|). | |
| 4052 "mode" Modes for which the mapping is defined. In | |
| 4053 addition to the modes mentioned above, these | |
| 4054 characters will be used: | |
| 4055 " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending | |
| 4056 "!" Insert and Commandline mode | |
| 2642 | 4057 (|mapmode-ic|) |
| 2625 | 4058 "sid" The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings |
| 4059 (|<SID>|). | |
| 2610 | 4060 |
| 7 | 4061 The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, |
| 4062 then the global mappings. | |
| 626 | 4063 This function can be used to map a key even when it's already |
| 4064 mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: > | |
| 4065 exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n') | |
| 4066 | |
| 7 | 4067 |
| 782 | 4068 mapcheck({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()* |
| 7 | 4069 Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode |
| 4070 {mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in | |
| 4071 {name}. | |
| 782 | 4072 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations |
| 4073 instead of mappings. | |
| 7 | 4074 A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and |
| 4075 with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}. | |
| 4076 | |
| 1621 | 4077 matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~ |
| 7 | 4078 mapcheck("a") yes yes yes |
| 4079 mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes | |
| 4080 mapcheck("ax") yes no no | |
| 4081 mapcheck("b") no no no | |
| 4082 | |
| 4083 The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a | |
| 4084 mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a | |
| 4085 mapping for {name} exactly. | |
| 4086 When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty | |
| 4087 String is returned. If there is one, the rhs of that mapping | |
| 4088 is returned. If there are several mappings that start with | |
| 4089 {name}, the rhs of one of them is returned. | |
| 4090 The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, | |
| 4091 then the global mappings. | |
| 4092 This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added | |
| 4093 without being ambiguous. Example: > | |
| 4094 :if mapcheck("_vv") == "" | |
| 4095 : map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR> | |
| 4096 :endif | |
| 4097 < This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a | |
| 4098 mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv". | |
| 4099 | |
| 19 | 4100 match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *match()* |
| 685 | 4101 When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the |
| 4102 first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a | |
| 692 | 4103 String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed. |
| 1621 | 4104 Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a |
| 95 | 4105 Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where |
| 4106 {pat} matches. | |
| 685 | 4107 A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero. |
| 19 | 4108 If there is no match -1 is returned. |
| 2833 | 4109 For getting submatches see |matchlist()|. |
| 19 | 4110 Example: > |
| 95 | 4111 :echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4 |
| 714 | 4112 :echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1 |
| 95 | 4113 < See |string-match| for how {pat} is used. |
| 170 | 4114 *strpbrk()* |
| 1621 | 4115 Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: > |
| 170 | 4116 :let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]') |
| 4117 < *strcasestr()* | |
| 4118 Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add | |
| 4119 "\c" to the pattern to ignore case: > | |
| 4120 :let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle') | |
| 4121 < | |
| 95 | 4122 If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index |
| 685 | 4123 {start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|. |
| 7 | 4124 The result, however, is still the index counted from the |
| 236 | 4125 first character/item. Example: > |
| 7 | 4126 :echo match("testing", "ing", 2) |
| 4127 < result is again "4". > | |
| 4128 :echo match("testing", "ing", 4) | |
| 4129 < result is again "4". > | |
| 4130 :echo match("testing", "t", 2) | |
| 4131 < result is "3". | |
| 694 | 4132 For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts |
| 703 | 4133 {start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except |
| 4134 when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the | |
| 4135 {start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it | |
| 4136 backwards compatible). | |
| 95 | 4137 For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list |
| 4138 the index is counted from the end. | |
| 697 | 4139 If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a |
| 4140 String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned. | |
| 95 | 4141 |
| 694 | 4142 When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match |
| 697 | 4143 is found in a String the search for the next one starts one |
| 694 | 4144 character further. Thus this example results in 1: > |
| 4145 echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2) | |
| 4146 < In a |List| the search continues in the next item. | |
| 703 | 4147 Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes, |
| 4148 see above. | |
| 694 | 4149 |
| 7 | 4150 See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted. |
| 4151 The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of | |
| 1621 | 4152 the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always |
| 7 | 4153 done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty. |
| 4154 | |
| 1326 | 4155 *matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801* |
| 4156 matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]]) | |
| 4157 Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a | |
| 4158 "match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an | |
| 4159 identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the | |
| 4160 match using |matchdelete()|. | |
| 4161 | |
| 4162 The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the | |
| 1621 | 4163 match. A match with a high priority will have its |
| 1326 | 4164 highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority. |
| 4165 A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no | |
| 4166 exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the | |
| 4167 default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero, | |
| 4168 hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will | |
| 4169 overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate | |
| 4170 mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will | |
| 4171 always overrule syntax highlighting. | |
| 4172 | |
| 4173 The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific | |
| 4174 match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error | |
| 4175 message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID | |
| 4176 is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2 | |
| 4177 and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|, | |
| 4178 respectively. If the {id} argument is not specified, | |
| 4179 |matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID. | |
| 4180 | |
| 4181 The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with | |
| 4182 the |:match| commands. | |
| 4183 | |
| 4184 Example: > | |
| 4185 :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green | |
| 4186 :let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO") | |
| 4187 < Deletion of the pattern: > | |
| 4188 :call matchdelete(m) | |
| 4189 | |
| 4190 < A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are | |
| 1621 | 4191 available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in |
| 1326 | 4192 one operation by |clearmatches()|. |
| 819 | 4193 |
| 4194 matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()* | |
| 856 | 4195 Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|, |
| 819 | 4196 |:2match| or |:3match| command. |
| 4197 Return a |List| with two elements: | |
| 4198 The name of the highlight group used | |
| 4199 The pattern used. | |
| 4200 When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|. | |
| 4201 When there is no match item set returns ['', '']. | |
| 1326 | 4202 This is useful to save and restore a |:match|. |
| 4203 Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited | |
| 4204 to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation. | |
| 4205 | |
| 4206 matchdelete({id}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803* | |
| 4207 Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()| | |
| 1621 | 4208 or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful, |
| 1326 | 4209 otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can |
| 4210 be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|. | |
| 819 | 4211 |
| 19 | 4212 matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchend()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4213 Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4214 after the match. Example: > |
| 7 | 4215 :echo matchend("testing", "ing") |
| 4216 < results in "7". | |
| 170 | 4217 *strspn()* *strcspn()* |
| 4218 Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can | |
| 4219 do it with matchend(): > | |
| 4220 :let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]') | |
| 4221 :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]') | |
| 4222 < Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches. | |
| 4223 | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4224 The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > |
| 7 | 4225 :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2) |
| 4226 < results in "7". > | |
| 4227 :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5) | |
| 4228 < result is "-1". | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4229 When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|. |
| 7 | 4230 |
| 158 | 4231 matchlist({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchlist()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4232 Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the |
| 158 | 4233 list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would |
| 4234 return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc. | |
| 842 | 4235 in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an |
| 4236 empty string is used. Example: > | |
| 4237 echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)') | |
| 4238 < Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', ''] | |
| 158 | 4239 When there is no match an empty list is returned. |
| 4240 | |
| 19 | 4241 matchstr({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchstr()* |
| 1621 | 4242 Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: > |
| 7 | 4243 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing") |
| 4244 < results in "ing". | |
| 4245 When there is no match "" is returned. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4246 The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > |
| 7 | 4247 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2) |
| 4248 < results in "ing". > | |
| 4249 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5) | |
| 4250 < result is "". | |
| 685 | 4251 When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned. |
| 95 | 4252 The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String. |
| 7 | 4253 |
| 87 | 4254 *max()* |
| 4255 max({list}) Return the maximum value of all items in {list}. | |
| 4256 If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot | |
| 4257 be used as a Number this results in an error. | |
| 685 | 4258 An empty |List| results in zero. |
| 87 | 4259 |
| 4260 *min()* | |
| 1215 | 4261 min({list}) Return the minimum value of all items in {list}. |
| 87 | 4262 If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot |
| 4263 be used as a Number this results in an error. | |
| 685 | 4264 An empty |List| results in zero. |
| 87 | 4265 |
| 843 | 4266 *mkdir()* *E739* |
| 168 | 4267 mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]]) |
| 4268 Create directory {name}. | |
| 4269 If {path} is "p" then intermediate directories are created as | |
| 4270 necessary. Otherwise it must be "". | |
| 4271 If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of | |
| 4272 the new directory. The default is 0755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for | |
| 1621 | 4273 the user readable for others). Use 0700 to make it unreadable |
| 1702 | 4274 for others. This is only used for the last part of {name}. |
| 4275 Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be created | |
| 4276 with 0755. | |
| 4277 Example: > | |
| 4278 :call mkdir($HOME . "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0700) | |
| 4279 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 168 | 4280 Not available on all systems. To check use: > |
| 4281 :if exists("*mkdir") | |
| 4282 < | |
| 7 | 4283 *mode()* |
| 1621 | 4284 mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode. |
| 1661 | 4285 If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or |
| 4286 a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is | |
| 4287 returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned. Note | |
| 4288 that " " and "0" are also non-empty strings. | |
| 1621 | 4289 |
| 7 | 4290 n Normal |
| 1621 | 4291 no Operator-pending |
| 7 | 4292 v Visual by character |
| 4293 V Visual by line | |
| 4294 CTRL-V Visual blockwise | |
| 4295 s Select by character | |
| 4296 S Select by line | |
| 4297 CTRL-S Select blockwise | |
| 4298 i Insert | |
| 1621 | 4299 R Replace |R| |
| 4300 Rv Virtual Replace |gR| | |
| 7 | 4301 c Command-line |
| 1621 | 4302 cv Vim Ex mode |gQ| |
| 4303 ce Normal Ex mode |Q| | |
| 7 | 4304 r Hit-enter prompt |
| 1621 | 4305 rm The -- more -- prompt |
| 4306 r? A |:confirm| query of some sort | |
| 4307 ! Shell or external command is executing | |
| 4308 This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used | |
| 4309 with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns | |
| 4310 "c" or "n". | |
| 4311 Also see |visualmode()|. | |
| 7 | 4312 |
|
2050
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4313 mzeval({expr}) *mzeval()* |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4314 Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4315 convert to Vim data structures. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4316 Numbers and strings are returned as they are. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4317 Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4318 returned as Vim |Lists|. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4319 Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4320 converted to strings. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4321 All other types are converted to string with display function. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4322 Examples: > |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4323 :mz (define l (list 1 2 3)) |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4324 :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l) |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4325 :echo mzeval("l") |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4326 :echo mzeval("h") |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4327 < |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4328 {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature} |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4329 |
| 7 | 4330 nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()* |
| 4331 Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum} | |
| 4332 that is not blank. Example: > | |
| 4333 if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java" | |
| 4334 < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or | |
| 4335 below it, zero is returned. | |
| 4336 See also |prevnonblank()|. | |
| 4337 | |
| 4338 nr2char({expr}) *nr2char()* | |
| 4339 Return a string with a single character, which has the number | |
| 4340 value {expr}. Examples: > | |
| 4341 nr2char(64) returns "@" | |
| 4342 nr2char(32) returns " " | |
| 4343 < The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": > | |
| 4344 nr2char(300) returns I with bow character | |
| 4345 < Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with | |
| 4346 nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline | |
| 4347 characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the | |
| 119 | 4348 string, thus results in an empty string. |
| 7 | 4349 |
| 1548 | 4350 *getpid()* |
| 4351 getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process. | |
| 1621 | 4352 On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim |
| 4353 exits. On MS-DOS it's always zero. | |
| 1548 | 4354 |
| 703 | 4355 *getpos()* |
| 707 | 4356 getpos({expr}) Get the position for {expr}. For possible values of {expr} |
| 4357 see |line()|. | |
| 4358 The result is a |List| with four numbers: | |
| 4359 [bufnum, lnum, col, off] | |
| 4360 "bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it | |
| 4361 is the buffer number of the mark. | |
| 4362 "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first | |
| 4363 column is 1. | |
| 703 | 4364 The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then |
| 4365 it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the | |
| 1266 | 4366 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last |
| 703 | 4367 character. |
| 4368 This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: > | |
| 4369 let save_cursor = getpos(".") | |
| 4370 MoveTheCursorAround | |
| 798 | 4371 call setpos('.', save_cursor) |
| 707 | 4372 < Also see |setpos()|. |
| 703 | 4373 |
| 3214 | 4374 or({expr}, {expr}) *or()* |
| 4375 Bitwise OR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted | |
| 4376 to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. | |
| 4377 Example: > | |
| 4378 :let bits = or(bits, 0x80) | |
| 4379 | |
| 4380 | |
| 819 | 4381 pathshorten({expr}) *pathshorten()* |
| 4382 Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the | |
| 4383 result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other | |
| 4384 components in the path are reduced to single letters. Leading | |
| 4385 '~' and '.' characters are kept. Example: > | |
| 4386 :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim') | |
| 4387 < ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~ | |
| 4388 It doesn't matter if the path exists or not. | |
| 4389 | |
| 1621 | 4390 pow({x}, {y}) *pow()* |
| 4391 Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|. | |
| 4392 {x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 4393 Examples: > | |
| 4394 :echo pow(3, 3) | |
| 4395 < 27.0 > | |
| 4396 :echo pow(2, 16) | |
| 4397 < 65536.0 > | |
| 4398 :echo pow(32, 0.20) | |
| 4399 < 2.0 | |
| 4400 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 4401 | |
| 667 | 4402 prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()* |
| 4403 Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum} | |
| 4404 that is not blank. Example: > | |
| 4405 let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)) | |
| 4406 < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or | |
| 4407 above it, zero is returned. | |
| 4408 Also see |nextnonblank()|. | |
| 4409 | |
| 4410 | |
| 449 | 4411 printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()* |
| 4412 Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by | |
| 4413 the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: > | |
| 452 | 4414 printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg) |
| 449 | 4415 < May result in: |
| 452 | 4416 " 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~ |
| 449 | 4417 |
| 4418 Often used items are: | |
| 856 | 4419 %s string |
| 653 | 4420 %6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes |
| 1621 | 4421 %.9s string truncated to 9 bytes |
| 4422 %c single byte | |
| 4423 %d decimal number | |
| 4424 %5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters | |
| 4425 %x hex number | |
| 4426 %04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters | |
| 4427 %X hex number using upper case letters | |
| 4428 %o octal number | |
| 4429 %f floating point number in the form 123.456 | |
| 4430 %e floating point number in the form 1.234e3 | |
| 4431 %E floating point number in the form 1.234E3 | |
| 4432 %g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value | |
| 4433 %G floating point number, as %f or %E depending on value | |
| 4434 %% the % character itself | |
| 449 | 4435 |
| 4436 Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the | |
| 4437 conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to | |
| 4438 the result. | |
| 4439 | |
| 4440 The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following | |
| 452 | 4441 arguments appear in sequence: |
| 4442 | |
| 4443 % [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type | |
| 4444 | |
| 856 | 4445 flags |
| 452 | 4446 Zero or more of the following flags: |
| 4447 | |
| 449 | 4448 # The value should be converted to an "alternate |
| 4449 form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option | |
| 4450 has no effect. For o conversions, the precision | |
| 4451 of the number is increased to force the first | |
| 4452 character of the output string to a zero (except | |
| 4453 if a zero value is printed with an explicit | |
| 4454 precision of zero). | |
| 4455 For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has | |
| 4456 the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions) | |
| 4457 prepended to it. | |
| 452 | 4458 |
| 449 | 4459 0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted |
| 4460 value is padded on the left with zeros rather | |
| 4461 than blanks. If a precision is given with a | |
| 4462 numeric conversion (d, o, x, and X), the 0 flag | |
| 4463 is ignored. | |
| 452 | 4464 |
| 449 | 4465 - A negative field width flag; the converted value |
| 4466 is to be left adjusted on the field boundary. | |
| 4467 The converted value is padded on the right with | |
| 4468 blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or | |
| 4469 zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given. | |
| 452 | 4470 |
| 449 | 4471 ' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive |
| 4472 number produced by a signed conversion (d). | |
| 452 | 4473 |
| 449 | 4474 + A sign must always be placed before a number |
| 1621 | 4475 produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides |
| 449 | 4476 a space if both are used. |
| 452 | 4477 |
| 4478 field-width | |
| 4479 An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum | |
| 653 | 4480 field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes |
| 4481 than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on | |
| 4482 the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has | |
| 4483 been given) to fill out the field width. | |
| 452 | 4484 |
| 4485 .precision | |
| 4486 An optional precision, in the form of a period '.' | |
| 4487 followed by an optional digit string. If the digit | |
| 4488 string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero. | |
| 4489 This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for | |
| 4490 d, o, x, and X conversions, or the maximum number of | |
| 653 | 4491 bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions. |
| 1621 | 4492 For floating point it is the number of digits after |
| 4493 the decimal point. | |
| 452 | 4494 |
| 4495 type | |
| 4496 A character that specifies the type of conversion to | |
| 4497 be applied, see below. | |
| 4498 | |
| 449 | 4499 A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an |
| 4500 asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a | |
| 1621 | 4501 Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A |
| 449 | 4502 negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag |
| 4503 followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is | |
| 4504 treated as though it were missing. Example: > | |
| 452 | 4505 :echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line) |
| 449 | 4506 < This limits the length of the text used from "line" to |
| 452 | 4507 "width" bytes. |
| 449 | 4508 |
| 856 | 4509 The conversion specifiers and their meanings are: |
| 452 | 4510 |
| 1621 | 4511 *printf-d* *printf-o* *printf-x* *printf-X* |
| 4512 doxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal | |
| 449 | 4513 (d), unsigned octal (o), or unsigned hexadecimal (x |
| 4514 and X) notation. The letters "abcdef" are used for | |
| 4515 x conversions; the letters "ABCDEF" are used for X | |
| 452 | 4516 conversions. |
| 4517 The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of | |
| 4518 digits that must appear; if the converted value | |
| 4519 requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with | |
| 4520 zeros. | |
| 4521 In no case does a non-existent or small field width | |
| 4522 cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of | |
| 4523 a conversion is wider than the field width, the field | |
| 4524 is expanded to contain the conversion result. | |
| 4525 | |
| 1621 | 4526 *printf-c* |
| 452 | 4527 c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the |
| 4528 resulting character is written. | |
| 4529 | |
| 1621 | 4530 *printf-s* |
| 452 | 4531 s The text of the String argument is used. If a |
| 4532 precision is specified, no more bytes than the number | |
| 4533 specified are used. | |
| 4534 | |
| 1621 | 4535 *printf-f* *E807* |
| 4536 f The Float argument is converted into a string of the | |
| 4537 form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of | |
| 4538 digits after the decimal point. When the precision is | |
| 4539 zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision | |
| 4540 is not specified 6 is used. A really big number | |
| 4541 (out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf". | |
| 4542 "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan". | |
| 4543 Example: > | |
| 4544 echo printf("%.2f", 12.115) | |
| 4545 < 12.12 | |
| 4546 Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries. | |
| 4547 Use |round()| when in doubt. | |
| 4548 | |
| 4549 *printf-e* *printf-E* | |
| 4550 e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the | |
| 4551 form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The | |
| 4552 precision specifies the number of digits after the | |
| 4553 decimal point, like with 'f'. | |
| 4554 | |
| 4555 *printf-g* *printf-G* | |
| 4556 g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the | |
| 4557 value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0 | |
| 4558 (exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E' | |
| 4559 for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous | |
| 4560 zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero | |
| 4561 immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0 | |
| 4562 results in 1.0e7. | |
| 4563 | |
| 4564 *printf-%* | |
| 449 | 4565 % A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The |
| 4566 complete conversion specification is "%%". | |
| 452 | 4567 |
| 1668 | 4568 When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also |
| 4569 accepted and automatically converted. | |
| 4570 When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument | |
| 4571 is also accepted and automatically converted. | |
| 4572 Any other argument type results in an error message. | |
| 449 | 4573 |
| 459 | 4574 *E766* *E767* |
| 449 | 4575 The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number |
| 4576 of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many | |
| 452 | 4577 arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used. |
| 449 | 4578 |
| 4579 | |
| 667 | 4580 pumvisible() *pumvisible()* |
| 4581 Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero | |
| 4582 otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|. | |
| 712 | 4583 This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the |
| 4584 popup menu. | |
| 7 | 4585 |
| 114 | 4586 *E726* *E727* |
| 99 | 4587 range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()* |
| 685 | 4588 Returns a |List| with Numbers: |
| 99 | 4589 - If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1] |
| 4590 - If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}] | |
| 4591 - If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ..., | |
| 4592 {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not | |
| 4593 producing a value past {max}). | |
| 336 | 4594 When the maximum is one before the start the result is an |
| 4595 empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the | |
| 4596 start this is an error. | |
| 99 | 4597 Examples: > |
| 856 | 4598 range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3] |
| 99 | 4599 range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4] |
| 4600 range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8] | |
| 856 | 4601 range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2] |
| 336 | 4602 range(0) " [] |
| 4603 range(2, 0) " error! | |
| 99 | 4604 < |
| 158 | 4605 *readfile()* |
| 168 | 4606 readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]]) |
| 685 | 4607 Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file |
| 4608 as an item. Lines broken at NL characters. Macintosh files | |
| 158 | 4609 separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a |
| 4610 NL appears somewhere). | |
|
2513
a88237afdb20
Change readfile() to ignore byte order marks, unless in binary mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
4611 All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character. |
| 158 | 4612 When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used: |
| 4613 - When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is | |
| 4614 added. | |
| 4615 - No CR characters are removed. | |
| 4616 Otherwise: | |
| 4617 - CR characters that appear before a NL are removed. | |
| 4618 - Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter. | |
|
2513
a88237afdb20
Change readfile() to ignore byte order marks, unless in binary mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
4619 - When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is |
|
a88237afdb20
Change readfile() to ignore byte order marks, unless in binary mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
4620 removed from the text. |
| 168 | 4621 When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines |
| 4622 to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten | |
| 4623 lines of a file: > | |
| 4624 :for line in readfile(fname, '', 10) | |
| 4625 : if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif | |
| 4626 :endfor | |
| 233 | 4627 < When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file |
| 4628 are returned, or as many as there are. | |
| 4629 When {max} is zero the result is an empty list. | |
| 168 | 4630 Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory. |
| 4631 Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a | |
| 4632 file into a buffer if you need to. | |
| 158 | 4633 When the file can't be opened an error message is given and |
| 4634 the result is an empty list. | |
| 4635 Also see |writefile()|. | |
| 4636 | |
| 794 | 4637 reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) *reltime()* |
| 4638 Return an item that represents a time value. The format of | |
| 4639 the item depends on the system. It can be passed to | |
| 4640 |reltimestr()| to convert it to a string. | |
| 4641 Without an argument it returns the current time. | |
| 4642 With one argument is returns the time passed since the time | |
| 4643 specified in the argument. | |
| 843 | 4644 With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start} |
| 794 | 4645 and {end}. |
| 4646 The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by | |
| 4647 reltime(). | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4648 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} |
| 794 | 4649 |
| 4650 reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()* | |
| 4651 Return a String that represents the time value of {time}. | |
| 4652 This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of | |
| 4653 microseconds. Example: > | |
| 4654 let start = reltime() | |
| 4655 call MyFunction() | |
| 4656 echo reltimestr(reltime(start)) | |
| 4657 < Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time. | |
| 4658 The accuracy depends on the system. | |
| 1156 | 4659 Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You |
| 4660 can use split() to remove it. > | |
| 4661 echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0] | |
| 4662 < Also see |profiling|. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4663 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} |
| 794 | 4664 |
| 7 | 4665 *remote_expr()* *E449* |
| 4666 remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) | |
| 1621 | 4667 Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as an |
| 7 | 4668 expression and the result is returned after evaluation. |
| 714 | 4669 The result must be a String or a |List|. A |List| is turned |
| 4670 into a String by joining the items with a line break in | |
| 4671 between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n"). | |
| 7 | 4672 If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a |
| 4673 variable and a {serverid} for later use with | |
| 4674 remote_read() is stored there. | |
| 4675 See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. | |
| 4676 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4677 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4678 Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued | |
| 4679 and the result will be the empty string. | |
| 4680 Examples: > | |
| 4681 :echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2") | |
| 4682 :echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax") | |
| 4683 < | |
| 4684 | |
| 4685 remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()* | |
| 4686 Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground. | |
| 4687 This works like: > | |
| 4688 remote_expr({server}, "foreground()") | |
| 4689 < Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work | |
| 4690 around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server | |
| 4691 to bring itself to the foreground. | |
| 574 | 4692 Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized, |
| 4693 like foreground() does. | |
| 7 | 4694 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. |
| 4695 {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the | |
| 4696 Win32 console version} | |
| 4697 | |
| 4698 | |
| 4699 remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()* | |
| 4700 Returns a positive number if there are available strings | |
| 4701 from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable | |
| 1621 | 4702 {retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the |
| 7 | 4703 name of a variable. |
| 4704 Returns zero if none are available. | |
| 4705 Returns -1 if something is wrong. | |
| 4706 See also |clientserver|. | |
| 4707 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4708 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4709 Examples: > | |
| 4710 :let repl = "" | |
| 4711 :echo "PEEK: ".remote_peek(id, "repl").": ".repl | |
| 4712 | |
| 4713 remote_read({serverid}) *remote_read()* | |
| 4714 Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume | |
| 4715 it. It blocks until a reply is available. | |
| 4716 See also |clientserver|. | |
| 4717 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4718 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4719 Example: > | |
| 4720 :echo remote_read(id) | |
| 4721 < | |
| 4722 *remote_send()* *E241* | |
| 4723 remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) | |
| 1621 | 4724 Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as input |
| 22 | 4725 keys and the function returns immediately. At the Vim server |
| 4726 the keys are not mapped |:map|. | |
| 667 | 4727 If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable |
| 4728 and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored | |
| 4729 there. | |
| 7 | 4730 See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. |
| 4731 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4732 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4733 Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess | |
| 4734 up the display. | |
| 4735 Examples: > | |
| 4736 :echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply ".file, "serverid"). | |
| 4737 \ remote_read(serverid) | |
| 4738 | |
| 4739 :autocmd NONE RemoteReply * | |
| 4740 \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>")) | |
| 4741 :echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo ". | |
| 4742 \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>') | |
| 82 | 4743 < |
| 79 | 4744 remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) *remove()* |
| 685 | 4745 Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4746 return the item. |
| 79 | 4747 With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4748 return a List with these items. When {idx} points to the same |
| 79 | 4749 item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end} |
| 4750 points to an item before {idx} this is an error. | |
| 4751 See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}. | |
| 55 | 4752 Example: > |
| 4753 :echo "last item: " . remove(mylist, -1) | |
| 79 | 4754 :call remove(mylist, 0, 9) |
| 99 | 4755 remove({dict}, {key}) |
| 4756 Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key}. Example: > | |
| 4757 :echo "removed " . remove(dict, "one") | |
| 4758 < If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error. | |
| 4759 | |
| 4760 Use |delete()| to remove a file. | |
| 55 | 4761 |
| 7 | 4762 rename({from}, {to}) *rename()* |
| 4763 Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This | |
| 4764 should also work to move files across file systems. The | |
| 4765 result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed | |
| 4766 successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed. | |
| 1851 | 4767 NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning. |
| 7 | 4768 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. |
| 4769 | |
| 18 | 4770 repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()* |
| 4771 Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated | |
| 4772 result. Example: > | |
| 843 | 4773 :let separator = repeat('-', 80) |
| 18 | 4774 < When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty. |
| 685 | 4775 When {expr} is a |List| the result is {expr} concatenated |
| 1621 | 4776 {count} times. Example: > |
| 79 | 4777 :let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3) |
| 4778 < Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b']. | |
| 18 | 4779 |
| 82 | 4780 |
| 7 | 4781 resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655* |
| 4782 On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file), | |
| 4783 returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form. | |
| 4784 On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path | |
| 4785 components of {filename} and return the simplified result. | |
| 4786 To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is | |
| 4787 stopped after 100 iterations. | |
| 4788 On other systems, return the simplified {filename}. | |
| 4789 The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|. | |
| 4790 resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the | |
| 4791 current directory (provided the result is still a relative | |
| 4792 path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator. | |
| 4793 | |
| 82 | 4794 *reverse()* |
| 1621 | 4795 reverse({list}) Reverse the order of items in {list} in-place. Returns |
| 82 | 4796 {list}. |
| 4797 If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 4798 :let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist)) | |
| 4799 | |
| 1621 | 4800 round({expr}) *round()* |
| 1668 | 4801 Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it |
| 1621 | 4802 as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral |
| 4803 values, then use the larger one (away from zero). | |
| 4804 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 4805 Examples: > | |
| 4806 echo round(0.456) | |
| 4807 < 0.0 > | |
| 4808 echo round(4.5) | |
| 4809 < 5.0 > | |
| 4810 echo round(-4.5) | |
| 4811 < -5.0 | |
| 4812 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 4813 | |
| 4814 | |
| 1496 | 4815 search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *search()* |
| 7 | 4816 Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the |
| 119 | 4817 cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it). |
| 707 | 4818 |
| 3312 | 4819 If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't |
| 4820 move. No error message is given. | |
| 4821 When a match has been found its line number is returned. | |
| 4822 | |
| 7 | 4823 {flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags: |
| 4824 'b' search backward instead of forward | |
| 1621 | 4825 'c' accept a match at the cursor position |
| 712 | 4826 'e' move to the End of the match |
| 20 | 4827 'n' do Not move the cursor |
| 712 | 4828 'p' return number of matching sub-pattern (see below) |
| 4829 's' set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor | |
| 7 | 4830 'w' wrap around the end of the file |
| 4831 'W' don't wrap around the end of the file | |
| 4832 If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies. | |
| 4833 | |
| 444 | 4834 If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the |
| 4835 cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n' | |
| 4836 flag. | |
| 4837 | |
| 1156 | 4838 'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used. |
| 4839 | |
| 692 | 4840 When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops |
| 4841 after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the | |
| 4842 search to a range of lines. Examples: > | |
| 4843 let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0")) | |
| 4844 let end = search('END', '', line("w$")) | |
| 4845 < When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies | |
| 4846 that the search does not wrap around the end of the file. | |
| 1496 | 4847 A zero value is equal to not giving the argument. |
| 4848 | |
| 4849 When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when | |
| 1621 | 4850 more than this many milli seconds have passed. Thus when |
| 1496 | 4851 {timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second. |
| 4852 The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not | |
| 4853 giving the argument. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4854 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} |
| 692 | 4855 |
| 714 | 4856 *search()-sub-match* |
| 4857 With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the | |
| 4858 first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the | |
| 4859 whole pattern did match. | |
| 712 | 4860 To get the column number too use |searchpos()|. |
| 4861 | |
| 20 | 4862 The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n' |
| 707 | 4863 flag is used. |
| 7 | 4864 |
| 4865 Example (goes over all files in the argument list): > | |
| 4866 :let n = 1 | |
| 4867 :while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist | |
| 4868 : exe "argument " . n | |
| 4869 : " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the | |
| 4870 : " first search to find match at start of file | |
| 4871 : normal G$ | |
| 4872 : let flags = "w" | |
| 4873 : while search("foo", flags) > 0 | |
| 1621 | 4874 : s/foo/bar/g |
| 7 | 4875 : let flags = "W" |
| 4876 : endwhile | |
| 4877 : update " write the file if modified | |
| 4878 : let n = n + 1 | |
| 4879 :endwhile | |
| 4880 < | |
| 712 | 4881 Example for using some flags: > |
| 4882 :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe') | |
| 4883 < This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif" | |
| 4884 under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it | |
| 4885 returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0 | |
| 4886 if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the | |
| 4887 line: | |
| 4888 if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~ | |
| 4889 the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function | |
| 4890 finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens | |
| 4891 without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if". | |
| 4892 The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor. | |
| 4893 | |
| 504 | 4894 |
| 523 | 4895 searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()* |
| 4896 Search for the declaration of {name}. | |
| 856 | 4897 |
| 523 | 4898 With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find |
| 4899 first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find | |
| 4900 first match in the function. | |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block | |
| 4903 that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids | |
| 4904 finding variable declarations only valid in another scope. | |
| 4905 | |
| 504 | 4906 Moves the cursor to the found match. |
| 4907 Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. | |
| 4908 Example: > | |
| 4909 if searchdecl('myvar') == 0 | |
| 4910 echo getline('.') | |
| 4911 endif | |
| 4912 < | |
| 7 | 4913 *searchpair()* |
| 1496 | 4914 searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} |
| 4915 [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) | |
| 7 | 4916 Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be |
| 4917 used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other | |
| 4918 if/endif pairs in between are ignored. | |
| 677 | 4919 The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search |
| 4920 forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward. | |
| 4921 If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the | |
| 4922 line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is | |
| 4923 returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is | |
| 4924 given. | |
| 7 | 4925 |
| 4926 {start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They | |
| 4927 must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When | |
| 4928 {middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either | |
| 4929 direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A | |
| 4930 typical use is: > | |
| 4931 searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>') | |
| 4932 < By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped. | |
| 4933 | |
| 712 | 4934 {flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with |
| 4935 |search()|. Additionally: | |
| 7 | 4936 'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the |
| 1621 | 4937 outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag. |
| 4938 'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with | |
| 712 | 4939 the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used. |
| 1621 | 4940 Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to |
| 4941 avoid wrapping around the end of the file. | |
| 7 | 4942 |
| 4943 When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the | |
| 4944 {skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on | |
| 4945 the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this | |
| 4946 match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment | |
| 4947 or a string. | |
| 4948 When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted. | |
| 4949 When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted | |
| 4950 and -1 returned. | |
| 4951 | |
| 1496 | 4952 For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|. |
| 692 | 4953 |
| 7 | 4954 The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the |
| 4955 patterns are used like it's on. | |
| 4956 | |
| 4957 The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with | |
| 4958 {start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the | |
| 4959 direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: > | |
| 4960 if 1 | |
| 4961 if 2 | |
| 4962 endif 2 | |
| 4963 endif 1 | |
| 4964 < When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and | |
| 4965 searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on | |
| 4966 the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be | |
| 1621 | 4967 found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and |
| 7 | 4968 then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to |
| 4969 "endif 2". | |
| 4970 When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character, | |
| 4971 it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so | |
| 4972 that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds | |
| 4973 the matching start. | |
| 4974 | |
| 4975 Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: > | |
| 4976 | |
| 4977 :echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W', | |
| 4978 \ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""') | |
| 4979 | |
| 4980 < The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is | |
| 4981 to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid | |
| 4982 having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only | |
| 4983 catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command. | |
| 4984 Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a | |
| 4985 match. | |
| 4986 Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": > | |
| 4987 | |
| 4988 :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW') | |
| 4989 | |
| 4990 < This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a | |
| 4991 match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax | |
| 4992 highlighting recognized as strings: > | |
| 4993 | |
| 4994 :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', | |
| 4995 \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"') | |
| 4996 < | |
| 667 | 4997 *searchpairpos()* |
| 1496 | 4998 searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} |
| 4999 [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5000 Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and |
| 685 | 5001 column position of the match. The first element of the |List| |
| 5002 is the line number and the second element is the byte index of | |
| 667 | 5003 the column position of the match. If no match is found, |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5004 returns [0, 0]. > |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5005 |
| 667 | 5006 :let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n') |
| 5007 < | |
| 5008 See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example. | |
| 5009 | |
| 1496 | 5010 searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *searchpos()* |
| 692 | 5011 Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and |
| 685 | 5012 column position of the match. The first element of the |List| |
| 5013 is the line number and the second element is the byte index of | |
| 5014 the column position of the match. If no match is found, | |
| 5015 returns [0, 0]. | |
| 714 | 5016 Example: > |
| 5017 :let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n') | |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 < When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with | |
| 5020 the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: > | |
| 5021 :let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np') | |
| 5022 < In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is | |
| 5023 found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|. | |
| 5024 | |
| 7 | 5025 server2client( {clientid}, {string}) *server2client()* |
| 5026 Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid} | |
| 5027 that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>"). | |
| 5028 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 5029 Note: | |
| 5030 This id has to be stored before the next command can be | |
| 236 | 5031 received. I.e. before returning from the received command and |
| 7 | 5032 before calling any commands that waits for input. |
| 5033 See also |clientserver|. | |
| 5034 Example: > | |
| 5035 :echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO") | |
| 5036 < | |
| 5037 serverlist() *serverlist()* | |
| 5038 Return a list of available server names, one per line. | |
| 5039 When there are no servers or the information is not available | |
| 5040 an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|. | |
| 5041 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 5042 Example: > | |
| 5043 :echo serverlist() | |
| 5044 < | |
| 5045 setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()* | |
| 5046 Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {expr} to | |
| 5047 {val}. | |
| 5048 This also works for a global or local window option, but it | |
| 5049 doesn't work for a global or local window variable. | |
| 5050 For a local window option the global value is unchanged. | |
| 5051 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. | |
| 5052 Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used. | |
| 5053 Examples: > | |
| 5054 :call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1) | |
| 5055 :call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar") | |
| 5056 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 5057 | |
| 5058 setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()* | |
| 5059 Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position | |
| 1621 | 5060 {pos}. The first position is 1. |
| 7 | 5061 Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position. |
| 5062 Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use | |
| 99 | 5063 |c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For |
| 5064 |c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is | |
| 5065 set after the command line is set to the expression. For | |
| 5066 |c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but | |
| 5067 before inserting the resulting text. | |
| 7 | 5068 When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the |
| 5069 line. A number smaller than one has undefined results. | |
| 5070 Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command | |
| 5071 line. | |
| 5072 | |
| 1621 | 5073 setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()* |
| 3312 | 5074 Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}. To insert |
| 5075 lines use |append()|. | |
| 236 | 5076 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. |
| 1621 | 5077 When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be |
| 282 | 5078 added as a new line. |
| 236 | 5079 If this succeeds, 0 is returned. If this fails (most likely |
| 5080 because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned. Example: > | |
| 7 | 5081 :call setline(5, strftime("%c")) |
| 1621 | 5082 < When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines |
| 282 | 5083 will be set to the items in the list. Example: > |
| 5084 :call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']) | |
| 5085 < This is equivalent to: > | |
| 5086 :for [n, l] in [[5, 6, 7], ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']] | |
| 5087 : call setline(n, l) | |
| 5088 :endfor | |
| 7 | 5089 < Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set. |
| 5090 | |
| 647 | 5091 setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}]) *setloclist()* |
| 5092 Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}. | |
| 5093 When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location | |
| 648 | 5094 list window, the displayed location list is modified. For an |
| 5095 invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned. | |
| 1326 | 5096 Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|. |
| 5097 Also see |location-list|. | |
| 5098 | |
| 5099 setmatches({list}) *setmatches()* | |
| 5100 Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. Returns 0 | |
| 1621 | 5101 if successful, otherwise -1. All current matches are cleared |
| 1326 | 5102 before the list is restored. See example for |getmatches()|. |
| 230 | 5103 |
| 707 | 5104 *setpos()* |
| 5105 setpos({expr}, {list}) | |
| 5106 Set the position for {expr}. Possible values: | |
| 5107 . the cursor | |
| 5108 'x mark x | |
| 5109 | |
| 5110 {list} must be a |List| with four numbers: | |
| 5111 [bufnum, lnum, col, off] | |
| 5112 | |
| 1621 | 5113 "bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the |
| 856 | 5114 current buffer. Setting the cursor is only possible for |
| 707 | 5115 the current buffer. To set a mark in another buffer you can |
| 5116 use the |bufnr()| function to turn a file name into a buffer | |
| 5117 number. | |
| 798 | 5118 Does not change the jumplist. |
| 707 | 5119 |
| 5120 "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5121 column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5122 smaller than 1 then 1 is used. |
| 707 | 5123 |
| 5124 The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then | |
| 5125 it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the | |
| 1266 | 5126 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last |
| 707 | 5127 character. |
| 5128 | |
| 1533 | 5129 Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. |
| 5130 An error message is given if {expr} is invalid. | |
| 5131 | |
| 707 | 5132 Also see |getpos()| |
| 5133 | |
| 1156 | 5134 This does not restore the preferred column for moving |
| 5135 vertically. See |winrestview()| for that. | |
| 5136 | |
| 707 | 5137 |
| 277 | 5138 setqflist({list} [, {action}]) *setqflist()* |
| 647 | 5139 Create or replace or add to the quickfix list using the items |
| 5140 in {list}. Each item in {list} is a dictionary. | |
| 5141 Non-dictionary items in {list} are ignored. Each dictionary | |
| 5142 item can contain the following entries: | |
| 230 | 5143 |
| 1065 | 5144 bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid |
| 1621 | 5145 buffer |
| 1065 | 5146 filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not |
| 1621 | 5147 present or it is invalid. |
| 230 | 5148 lnum line number in the file |
| 233 | 5149 pattern search pattern used to locate the error |
| 230 | 5150 col column number |
| 233 | 5151 vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column |
| 856 | 5152 when zero: "col" is byte index |
| 233 | 5153 nr error number |
| 230 | 5154 text description of the error |
| 233 | 5155 type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc. |
| 5156 | |
| 5157 The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are | |
| 5158 optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to | |
| 5159 locate a matching error line. | |
| 1065 | 5160 If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or |
| 5161 neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the | |
| 5162 item will not be handled as an error line. | |
| 230 | 5163 If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will |
| 5164 be used. | |
| 2152 | 5165 If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be |
| 5166 cleared. | |
| 1065 | 5167 Note that the list is not exactly the same as what |
| 5168 |getqflist()| returns. | |
| 230 | 5169 |
| 277 | 5170 If {action} is set to 'a', then the items from {list} are |
| 5171 added to the existing quickfix list. If there is no existing | |
| 5172 list, then a new list is created. If {action} is set to 'r', | |
| 5173 then the items from the current quickfix list are replaced | |
| 5174 with the items from {list}. If {action} is not present or is | |
| 5175 set to ' ', then a new list is created. | |
| 5176 | |
| 230 | 5177 Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. |
| 5178 | |
| 5179 This function can be used to create a quickfix list | |
| 5180 independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like | |
| 5181 ":cc 1" to jump to the first position. | |
| 5182 | |
| 5183 | |
| 7 | 5184 *setreg()* |
| 5185 setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}]) | |
| 5186 Set the register {regname} to {value}. | |
| 5187 If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case, | |
| 5188 then the value is appended. | |
| 2423 | 5189 {options} can also contain a register type specification: |
| 7 | 5190 "c" or "v" |characterwise| mode |
| 5191 "l" or "V" |linewise| mode | |
| 5192 "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode | |
| 5193 If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is | |
| 5194 used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified | |
| 5195 then the width of the block is set to the number of characters | |
| 1266 | 5196 in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character). |
| 7 | 5197 |
| 5198 If {options} contains no register settings, then the default | |
| 5199 is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>. | |
| 5200 Setting the '=' register is not possible. | |
| 5201 Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. | |
| 5202 | |
| 5203 Examples: > | |
| 5204 :call setreg(v:register, @*) | |
| 5205 :call setreg('*', @%, 'ac') | |
| 5206 :call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5') | |
| 5207 | |
| 5208 < This example shows using the functions to save and restore a | |
| 5209 register. > | |
| 282 | 5210 :let var_a = getreg('a', 1) |
| 7 | 5211 :let var_amode = getregtype('a') |
| 5212 .... | |
| 5213 :call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode) | |
| 5214 | |
| 5215 < You can also change the type of a register by appending | |
| 5216 nothing: > | |
| 5217 :call setreg('a', '', 'al') | |
| 5218 | |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5219 settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabvar()* |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5220 Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5221 |t:var| |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5222 Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5223 Tabs are numbered starting with one. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5224 Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5225 TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5226 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5227 |
| 831 | 5228 settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()* |
| 5229 Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to | |
| 5230 {val}. | |
| 5231 Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage | |
| 5232 use |setwinvar()|. | |
| 5233 When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. | |
| 7 | 5234 This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it |
| 5235 doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable. | |
| 5236 For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged. | |
| 5237 Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used. | |
| 831 | 5238 Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger |
| 5239 TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands. | |
| 5240 Examples: > | |
| 5241 :call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0) | |
| 5242 :call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar") | |
| 5243 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 5244 | |
| 5245 setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()* | |
| 5246 Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page. | |
| 7 | 5247 Examples: > |
| 5248 :call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0) | |
| 5249 :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar") | |
| 5250 | |
| 1661 | 5251 shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5252 Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument. |
| 985 | 5253 On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, when 'shellslash' is not set, it |
| 1661 | 5254 will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double |
| 985 | 5255 quotes within {string}. |
| 5256 For other systems, it will enclose {string} in single quotes | |
| 5257 and replace all "'" with "'\''". | |
| 1661 | 5258 When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero |
| 5259 Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special | |
| 1698 | 5260 items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by |
| 5261 a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!| | |
| 1661 | 5262 command. |
| 1698 | 5263 The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg| |
| 5264 {special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is | |
| 5265 because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement | |
| 5266 even when inside single quotes. | |
| 5267 The <NL> character is also escaped. With a |non-zero-arg| | |
| 5268 {special} and 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's | |
| 5269 escaped a second time. | |
| 1661 | 5270 Example of use with a |:!| command: > |
| 5271 :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1) | |
| 5272 < This results in a directory listing for the file under the | |
| 5273 cursor. Example of use with |system()|: > | |
| 5274 :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%"))) | |
| 985 | 5275 |
| 5276 | |
| 7 | 5277 simplify({filename}) *simplify()* |
| 5278 Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing | |
| 5279 the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on | |
| 5280 Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in | |
| 5281 {filename} designates the current directory, this will be | |
| 5282 valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is | |
| 5283 not removed either. | |
| 5284 Example: > | |
| 5285 simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/" | |
| 5286 < Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is | |
| 5287 a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also | |
| 5288 removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same | |
| 5289 directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic | |
| 5290 links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|. | |
| 5291 | |
| 82 | 5292 |
| 1621 | 5293 sin({expr}) *sin()* |
| 5294 Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. | |
| 5295 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 5296 Examples: > | |
| 5297 :echo sin(100) | |
| 5298 < -0.506366 > | |
| 5299 :echo sin(-4.01) | |
| 5300 < 0.763301 | |
| 5301 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 5302 | |
| 5303 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5304 sinh({expr}) *sinh()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5305 Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5306 [-inf, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5307 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5308 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5309 :echo sinh(0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5310 < 0.521095 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5311 :echo sinh(-0.9) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5312 < -1.026517 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
5313 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5314 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5315 |
| 2902 | 5316 sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) *sort()* *E702* |
| 82 | 5317 Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}. If you |
| 5318 want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 5319 :let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist)) | |
| 5320 < Uses the string representation of each item to sort on. | |
| 692 | 5321 Numbers sort after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers. |
| 282 | 5322 For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|. |
| 82 | 5323 When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored. |
| 2902 | 5324 {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be |
| 5325 used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| | |
| 685 | 5326 When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function |
| 5327 is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5328 items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5329 bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5330 smaller if the first one sorts before the second one. |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5331 Example: > |
| 82 | 5332 func MyCompare(i1, i2) |
| 5333 return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1 | |
| 5334 endfunc | |
| 5335 let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare") | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5336 < A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5337 ignores overflow: > |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5338 func MyCompare(i1, i2) |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5339 return a:i1 - a:i2 |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5340 endfunc |
| 344 | 5341 < |
| 374 | 5342 *soundfold()* |
| 5343 soundfold({word}) | |
| 5344 Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first | |
| 1621 | 5345 language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports |
| 375 | 5346 soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is |
| 5347 possible the {word} is returned unmodified. | |
| 374 | 5348 This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that |
| 5349 the method can be quite slow. | |
| 5350 | |
| 344 | 5351 *spellbadword()* |
| 532 | 5352 spellbadword([{sentence}]) |
| 5353 Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under | |
| 5354 or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the | |
| 5355 bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the | |
| 5356 result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move. | |
| 5357 | |
| 5358 With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that | |
| 5359 is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the | |
| 5360 result is an empty string. | |
| 5361 | |
| 5362 The return value is a list with two items: | |
| 5363 - The badly spelled word or an empty string. | |
| 5364 - The type of the spelling error: | |
| 856 | 5365 "bad" spelling mistake |
| 532 | 5366 "rare" rare word |
| 5367 "local" word only valid in another region | |
| 5368 "caps" word should start with Capital | |
| 5369 Example: > | |
| 5370 echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox") | |
| 5371 < ['quik', 'bad'] ~ | |
| 5372 | |
| 5373 The spelling information for the current window is used. The | |
| 5374 'spell' option must be set and the value of 'spelllang' is | |
| 5375 used. | |
| 344 | 5376 |
| 5377 *spellsuggest()* | |
| 537 | 5378 spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) |
| 685 | 5379 Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}. |
| 344 | 5380 When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are |
| 5381 returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned. | |
| 5382 | |
| 537 | 5383 When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only |
| 5384 suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this | |
| 5385 after a match with 'spellcapcheck'. | |
| 5386 | |
| 344 | 5387 {word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text. |
| 5388 This allows for joining two words that were split. The | |
| 359 | 5389 suggestions also include the following text, thus you can |
| 5390 replace a line. | |
| 5391 | |
| 5392 {word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be | |
| 537 | 5393 returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions, |
| 5394 although it may appear capitalized. | |
| 344 | 5395 |
| 5396 The spelling information for the current window is used. The | |
| 375 | 5397 'spell' option must be set and the values of 'spelllang' and |
| 5398 'spellsuggest' are used. | |
| 344 | 5399 |
| 82 | 5400 |
| 282 | 5401 split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()* |
| 685 | 5402 Make a |List| out of {expr}. When {pattern} is omitted or |
| 5403 empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an | |
| 5404 item. | |
| 82 | 5405 Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches, |
| 282 | 5406 removing the matched characters. |
| 5407 When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the | |
| 5408 {keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero. | |
| 293 | 5409 Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one |
| 5410 character or when {keepempty} is non-zero. | |
| 82 | 5411 Example: > |
| 95 | 5412 :let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+') |
| 282 | 5413 < To split a string in individual characters: > |
| 236 | 5414 :for c in split(mystring, '\zs') |
| 258 | 5415 < If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs': > |
| 5416 :echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs') | |
| 5417 < ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~ | |
| 282 | 5418 Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: > |
| 5419 :let items = split(line, ':', 1) | |
| 5420 < The opposite function is |join()|. | |
| 82 | 5421 |
| 5422 | |
| 1621 | 5423 sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()* |
| 5424 Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a | |
| 5425 |Float|. | |
| 5426 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr} | |
| 5427 is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number). | |
| 5428 Examples: > | |
| 5429 :echo sqrt(100) | |
| 5430 < 10.0 > | |
| 5431 :echo sqrt(-4.01) | |
| 5432 < nan | |
| 1668 | 5433 "nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries. |
| 1621 | 5434 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
| 5435 | |
| 5436 | |
| 5437 str2float( {expr}) *str2float()* | |
| 5438 Convert String {expr} to a Float. This mostly works the same | |
| 5439 as when using a floating point number in an expression, see | |
| 5440 |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive. | |
| 5441 E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to | |
| 5442 write "1.0e40". | |
| 5443 Text after the number is silently ignored. | |
| 5444 The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is | |
| 5445 set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to | |
| 5446 12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with | |
| 5447 |substitute()|: > | |
| 5448 let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g')) | |
| 5449 < {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 5450 | |
| 5451 | |
| 782 | 5452 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) *str2nr()* |
| 5453 Convert string {expr} to a number. | |
| 5454 {base} is the conversion base, it can be 8, 10 or 16. | |
| 5455 When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that | |
| 5456 a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as | |
| 5457 with the default String to Number conversion. | |
| 5458 When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a | |
| 5459 different base the result will be zero. | |
| 5460 Text after the number is silently ignored. | |
| 856 | 5461 |
| 782 | 5462 |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5463 strchars({expr}) *strchars()* |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5464 The result is a Number, which is the number of characters |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5465 String {expr} occupies. Composing characters are counted |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5466 separately. |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5467 Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5468 |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5469 strdisplaywidth({expr}[, {col}]) *strdisplaywidth()* |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5470 The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5471 String {expr} occupies on the screen. |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5472 When {col} is omitted zero is used. Otherwise it is the |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5473 screen column where to start. This matters for Tab |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5474 characters. |
|
2343
0703d2fd5749
Last few changes for the 7.3a BETA release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5475 The option settings of the current window are used. This |
|
0703d2fd5749
Last few changes for the 7.3a BETA release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5476 matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as |
|
0703d2fd5749
Last few changes for the 7.3a BETA release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5477 'tabstop' and 'display'. |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5478 When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5479 Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5480 Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|. |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5481 |
| 7 | 5482 strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()* |
| 5483 The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as | |
| 5484 specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used, | |
| 5485 or the current time if no time is given. The accepted | |
| 5486 {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable! | |
| 5487 See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the | |
| 5488 format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters. | |
| 5489 See also |localtime()| and |getftime()|. | |
| 5490 The language can be changed with the |:language| command. | |
| 5491 Examples: > | |
| 5492 :echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997 | |
| 5493 :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25 | |
| 5494 :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55 | |
| 5495 :echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55 | |
| 5496 :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c")) | |
| 5497 Show mod time of file.c. | |
| 82 | 5498 < Not available on all systems. To check use: > |
| 5499 :if exists("*strftime") | |
| 5500 | |
| 133 | 5501 stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()* |
| 5502 The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in | |
| 5503 {haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}. | |
| 140 | 5504 If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}. |
| 5505 This can be used to find a second match: > | |
| 2662 | 5506 :let colon1 = stridx(line, ":") |
| 5507 :let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1) | |
| 140 | 5508 < The search is done case-sensitive. |
| 205 | 5509 For pattern searches use |match()|. |
| 133 | 5510 -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. |
| 140 | 5511 See also |strridx()|. |
| 5512 Examples: > | |
| 7 | 5513 :echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3 |
| 5514 :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0 | |
| 5515 :echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1 | |
| 856 | 5516 < *strstr()* *strchr()* |
| 170 | 5517 stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used |
| 5518 with a single character it works similar to strchr(). | |
| 5519 | |
| 55 | 5520 *string()* |
| 95 | 5521 string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number, |
| 1621 | 5522 Float, String or a composition of them, then the result can be |
| 5523 parsed back with |eval()|. | |
| 55 | 5524 {expr} type result ~ |
| 99 | 5525 String 'string' |
| 95 | 5526 Number 123 |
| 1621 | 5527 Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8 |
| 99 | 5528 Funcref function('name') |
| 95 | 5529 List [item, item] |
| 323 | 5530 Dictionary {key: value, key: value} |
| 99 | 5531 Note that in String values the ' character is doubled. |
| 1156 | 5532 Also see |strtrans()|. |
| 55 | 5533 |
| 7 | 5534 *strlen()* |
| 5535 strlen({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the String | |
| 502 | 5536 {expr} in bytes. |
| 5537 If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters (not | |
| 5538 counting composing characters) use something like this: > | |
| 7 | 5539 |
| 5540 :let len = strlen(substitute(str, ".", "x", "g")) | |
| 502 | 5541 < |
| 55 | 5542 If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String. |
| 5543 For other types an error is given. | |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5544 Also see |len()|, |strchars()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5545 |strwidth()|. |
| 7 | 5546 |
| 5547 strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}]) *strpart()* | |
| 5548 The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from | |
| 574 | 5549 byte {start}, with the byte length {len}. |
| 7 | 5550 When non-existing bytes are included, this doesn't result in |
| 5551 an error, the bytes are simply omitted. | |
| 5552 If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the | |
| 5553 end of the {src}. > | |
| 5554 strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de" | |
| 5555 strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab" | |
| 5556 strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg" | |
| 1621 | 5557 strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg" |
| 7 | 5558 < Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For |
| 5559 example, to get three bytes under and after the cursor: > | |
| 823 | 5560 strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 3) |
| 7 | 5561 < |
| 140 | 5562 strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()* |
| 5563 The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in | |
| 5564 {haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}. | |
| 5565 When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are | |
| 5566 ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous | |
| 5567 match: > | |
| 5568 :let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",") | |
| 5569 :let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1) | |
| 5570 < The search is done case-sensitive. | |
| 133 | 5571 For pattern searches use |match()|. |
| 5572 -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. | |
| 22 | 5573 If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned. |
| 236 | 5574 See also |stridx()|. Examples: > |
| 7 | 5575 :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3 |
| 856 | 5576 < *strrchr()* |
| 170 | 5577 When used with a single character it works similar to the C |
| 5578 function strrchr(). | |
| 5579 | |
| 7 | 5580 strtrans({expr}) *strtrans()* |
| 5581 The result is a String, which is {expr} with all unprintable | |
| 5582 characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|. | |
| 5583 Like they are shown in a window. Example: > | |
| 5584 echo strtrans(@a) | |
| 5585 < This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of | |
| 5586 starting a new line. | |
| 5587 | |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5588 strwidth({expr}) *strwidth()* |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5589 The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5590 String {expr} occupies. A Tab character is counted as one |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5591 cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|. |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5592 When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5593 Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5594 Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|. |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5595 |
| 7 | 5596 submatch({nr}) *submatch()* |
| 2908 | 5597 Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or |
| 5598 substitute() function. | |
| 5599 Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr} | |
| 5600 is 0 the whole matched text is returned. | |
| 5601 Also see |sub-replace-expression|. | |
| 7 | 5602 Example: > |
| 5603 :s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/ | |
| 5604 < This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it. | |
| 5605 A line break is included as a newline character. | |
| 5606 | |
| 5607 substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()* | |
| 5608 The result is a String, which is a copy of {expr}, in which | |
| 2908 | 5609 the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}. |
| 5610 When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {expr} are | |
| 5611 replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "". | |
| 5612 | |
| 5613 This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags). | |
| 5614 But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic' | |
| 5615 option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts | |
| 5616 portable). 'ignorecase' is still relevant. 'smartcase' is | |
| 5617 not used. See |string-match| for how {pat} is used. | |
| 5618 | |
| 5619 A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}. | |
| 7 | 5620 Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning |
| 1621 | 5621 |sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with |
| 7 | 5622 "\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'. |
| 2908 | 5623 |
| 7 | 5624 When {pat} does not match in {expr}, {expr} is returned |
| 5625 unmodified. | |
| 2908 | 5626 |
| 7 | 5627 Example: > |
| 5628 :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "") | |
| 5629 < This removes the last component of the 'path' option. > | |
| 5630 :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "") | |
| 5631 < results in "TESTING". | |
| 2908 | 5632 |
| 5633 When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as | |
| 5634 an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|. Example: > | |
| 2833 | 5635 :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', |
| 5636 \ '\=nr2char("0x" . submatch(1))', 'g') | |
| 7 | 5637 |
| 32 | 5638 synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()* |
| 7 | 5639 The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position |
| 32 | 5640 {lnum} and {col} in the current window. |
| 7 | 5641 The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and |
| 5642 |synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text. | |
| 419 | 5643 |
| 32 | 5644 {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first |
| 419 | 5645 line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned. |
| 5646 | |
| 7 | 5647 When {trans} is non-zero, transparent items are reduced to the |
| 1621 | 5648 item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know |
| 7 | 5649 the effective color. When {trans} is zero, the transparent |
| 5650 item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which | |
| 5651 syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens). | |
| 5652 Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is | |
| 5653 obtained by going through the file in forward direction. | |
| 5654 | |
| 5655 Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): > | |
| 5656 :echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name") | |
| 5657 < | |
|
2401
e7751177126b
Add the synconcealed() function and use it for :TOhtml. (Benjamin Fritz)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
5658 |
| 7 | 5659 synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()* |
| 5660 The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of | |
| 5661 syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information | |
| 5662 about a syntax item. | |
| 5663 {mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes | |
| 1621 | 5664 for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is |
| 7 | 5665 used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are |
| 5666 used (GUI, cterm or term). | |
| 5667 Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups. | |
| 5668 {what} result | |
| 5669 "name" the name of the syntax item | |
| 5670 "fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set | |
| 5671 the color, cterm: color number as a string, | |
| 5672 term: empty string) | |
| 1755 | 5673 "bg" background color (as with "fg") |
|
2106
15674e198164
updated for version 7.2.389
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2072
diff
changeset
|
5674 "font" font name (only available in the GUI) |
|
15674e198164
updated for version 7.2.389
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2072
diff
changeset
|
5675 |highlight-font| |
| 1755 | 5676 "sp" special color (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp| |
| 7 | 5677 "fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is |
| 5678 running the name in "#RRGGBB" form | |
| 5679 "bg#" like "fg#" for "bg" | |
| 1755 | 5680 "sp#" like "fg#" for "sp" |
| 7 | 5681 "bold" "1" if bold |
| 5682 "italic" "1" if italic | |
| 5683 "reverse" "1" if reverse | |
| 5684 "inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse) | |
|
2106
15674e198164
updated for version 7.2.389
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2072
diff
changeset
|
5685 "standout" "1" if standout |
| 7 | 5686 "underline" "1" if underlined |
| 205 | 5687 "undercurl" "1" if undercurled |
| 7 | 5688 |
| 5689 Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the | |
| 5690 cursor): > | |
| 5691 :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg") | |
| 5692 < | |
| 5693 synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()* | |
| 5694 The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of | |
| 5695 {synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to | |
| 5696 highlight the character. Highlight links given with | |
| 5697 ":highlight link" are followed. | |
| 5698 | |
|
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5699 synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) *synconcealed()* |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5700 The result is a List. The first item in the list is 0 if the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5701 character at the position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5702 concealable region, 1 if it is. The second item in the list is |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5703 a string. If the first item is 1, the second item contains the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5704 text which will be displayed in place of the concealed text, |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5705 depending on the current setting of 'conceallevel'. The third |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5706 and final item in the list is a unique number representing the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5707 specific syntax region matched. This allows detection of the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5708 beginning of a new concealable region if there are two |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5709 consecutive regions with the same replacement character. |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5710 For an example use see $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/2html.vim . |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5711 |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5712 |
| 1500 | 5713 synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()* |
| 5714 Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the | |
| 5715 position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. Each item in | |
| 5716 the List is an ID like what |synID()| returns. | |
| 5717 The first item in the List is the outer region, following are | |
| 5718 items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()| | |
| 5719 returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a | |
| 5720 transparent item. | |
| 5721 This function is useful for debugging a syntax file. | |
| 5722 Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: > | |
| 5723 for id in synstack(line("."), col(".")) | |
| 5724 echo synIDattr(id, "name") | |
| 5725 endfor | |
|
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5726 < When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid |
|
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5727 nothing is returned. The position just after the last |
|
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5728 character in a line and the first column in an empty line are |
|
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5729 valid positions. |
| 1500 | 5730 |
| 24 | 5731 system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677* |
| 5732 Get the output of the shell command {expr}. | |
| 5733 When {input} is given, this string is written to a file and | |
| 5734 passed as stdin to the command. The string is written as-is, | |
| 5735 you need to take care of using the correct line separators | |
| 170 | 5736 yourself. Pipes are not used. |
| 1661 | 5737 Note: Use |shellescape()| to escape special characters in a |
| 5738 command argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to | |
| 5739 fail. The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may | |
| 5740 also cause trouble. | |
| 7 | 5741 This is not to be used for interactive commands. |
| 1661 | 5742 |
| 7 | 5743 The result is a String. Example: > |
| 1661 | 5744 :let files = system("ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'))) |
| 7 | 5745 |
| 5746 < To make the result more system-independent, the shell output | |
| 5747 is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and | |
| 5748 <CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems. | |
| 5749 The command executed is constructed using several options: | |
| 5750 'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote' | |
| 5751 ({tmp} is an automatically generated file name). | |
| 5752 For Unix and OS/2 braces are put around {expr} to allow for | |
| 5753 concatenated commands. | |
| 5754 | |
| 794 | 5755 The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a |
| 5756 CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least). | |
| 5757 | |
| 7 | 5758 The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|. |
| 5759 This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. | |
| 625 | 5760 |
| 5761 Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may | |
| 5762 make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail | |
| 5763 when using a security agent application. | |
| 7 | 5764 Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files. |
| 5765 Use |:checktime| to force a check. | |
| 5766 | |
| 205 | 5767 |
| 677 | 5768 tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()* |
| 685 | 5769 The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the |
| 677 | 5770 buffer associated with each window in the current tab page. |
| 5771 {arg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. When | |
| 5772 omitted the current tab page is used. | |
| 5773 When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned. | |
| 5774 To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: > | |
| 5775 tablist = [] | |
| 5776 for i in range(tabpagenr('$')) | |
| 5777 call extend(tablist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1)) | |
| 5778 endfor | |
| 5779 < Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window. | |
| 5780 | |
| 5781 | |
| 5782 tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()* | |
| 674 | 5783 The result is a Number, which is the number of the current |
| 5784 tab page. The first tab page has number 1. | |
| 5785 When the optional argument is "$", the number of the last tab | |
| 5786 page is returned (the tab page count). | |
| 5787 The number can be used with the |:tab| command. | |
| 5788 | |
| 5789 | |
| 677 | 5790 tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()* |
|
2569
f612f6b0b883
Docs fix for tabpagewinnr(). (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5791 Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}. |
| 677 | 5792 {tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. |
| 5793 {arg} is used like with |winnr()|: | |
| 5794 - When omitted the current window number is returned. This is | |
| 5795 the window which will be used when going to this tab page. | |
| 5796 - When "$" the number of windows is returned. | |
| 5797 - When "#" the previous window nr is returned. | |
| 5798 Useful examples: > | |
| 5799 tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1 | |
| 5800 tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4 | |
| 5801 < When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned. | |
| 5802 | |
| 805 | 5803 *tagfiles()* |
| 5804 tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags | |
| 5805 for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded. | |
| 5806 | |
| 5807 | |
| 205 | 5808 taglist({expr}) *taglist()* |
| 5809 Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}. | |
| 438 | 5810 Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following |
| 5811 entries: | |
| 648 | 5812 name Name of the tag. |
| 5813 filename Name of the file where the tag is | |
| 1156 | 5814 defined. It is either relative to the |
| 5815 current directory or a full path. | |
| 205 | 5816 cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in |
| 5817 the file. | |
| 648 | 5818 kind Type of the tag. The value for this |
| 205 | 5819 entry depends on the language specific |
| 1156 | 5820 kind values. Only available when |
| 5821 using a tags file generated by | |
| 5822 Exuberant ctags or hdrtag. | |
| 648 | 5823 static A file specific tag. Refer to |
| 205 | 5824 |static-tag| for more information. |
| 1156 | 5825 More entries may be present, depending on the content of the |
| 5826 tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature. | |
| 5827 Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these | |
| 5828 fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum" | |
| 5829 may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is | |
| 5830 contained in. | |
| 452 | 5831 |
| 216 | 5832 The ex-command 'cmd' can be either an ex search pattern, a |
| 5833 line number or a line number followed by a byte number. | |
| 205 | 5834 |
| 5835 If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned. | |
| 5836 | |
| 5837 To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be | |
| 5838 used in {expr}. Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information | |
| 5839 about the tag search regular expression pattern. | |
| 5840 | |
| 5841 Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is | |
| 5842 located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of | |
| 5843 the tags file generated by the different ctags tools. | |
| 5844 | |
| 7 | 5845 tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name* |
| 5846 The result is a String, which is the name of a file that | |
| 1621 | 5847 doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name |
| 7 | 5848 is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: > |
| 5849 :let tmpfile = tempname() | |
| 5850 :exe "redir > " . tmpfile | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5851 < For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|. |
| 7 | 5852 For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash' |
| 5853 option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'. | |
| 5854 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5855 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5856 tan({expr}) *tan()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5857 Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float| |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5858 in the range [-inf, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5859 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5860 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5861 :echo tan(10) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5862 < 0.648361 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5863 :echo tan(-4.01) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5864 < -1.181502 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
5865 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5866 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5867 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5868 tanh({expr}) *tanh()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5869 Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5870 range [-1, 1]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5871 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5872 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5873 :echo tanh(0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5874 < 0.462117 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5875 :echo tanh(-1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5876 < -0.761594 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
5877 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5878 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5879 |
| 7 | 5880 tolower({expr}) *tolower()* |
| 5881 The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase | |
| 5882 characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to | |
| 5883 the string). | |
| 5884 | |
| 5885 toupper({expr}) *toupper()* | |
| 5886 The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase | |
| 5887 characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to | |
| 5888 the string). | |
| 5889 | |
| 15 | 5890 tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()* |
| 5891 The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters | |
| 5892 which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that | |
| 5893 position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in | |
| 5894 {fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr} | |
| 5895 and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command. | |
| 5896 This code also deals with multibyte characters properly. | |
| 5897 | |
| 5898 Examples: > | |
| 5899 echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT") | |
| 5900 < returns "Hello THere" > | |
| 5901 echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}") | |
| 5902 < returns "{blob}" | |
| 5903 | |
| 1621 | 5904 trunc({expr}) *trunc()* |
| 1668 | 5905 Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or |
| 1621 | 5906 equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero). |
| 5907 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 5908 Examples: > | |
| 5909 echo trunc(1.456) | |
| 5910 < 1.0 > | |
| 5911 echo trunc(-5.456) | |
| 5912 < -5.0 > | |
| 5913 echo trunc(4.0) | |
| 5914 < 4.0 | |
| 5915 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 5916 | |
| 87 | 5917 *type()* |
| 5918 type({expr}) The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}: | |
| 153 | 5919 Number: 0 |
| 5920 String: 1 | |
| 5921 Funcref: 2 | |
| 5922 List: 3 | |
| 5923 Dictionary: 4 | |
| 1621 | 5924 Float: 5 |
| 153 | 5925 To avoid the magic numbers it should be used this way: > |
| 87 | 5926 :if type(myvar) == type(0) |
| 5927 :if type(myvar) == type("") | |
| 5928 :if type(myvar) == type(function("tr")) | |
| 5929 :if type(myvar) == type([]) | |
| 153 | 5930 :if type(myvar) == type({}) |
| 1621 | 5931 :if type(myvar) == type(0.0) |
| 7 | 5932 |
|
2236
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5933 undofile({name}) *undofile()* |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5934 Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5935 with name {name} when writing. This uses the 'undodir' |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5936 option, finding directories that exist. It does not check if |
|
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
5937 the undo file exists. |
|
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2236
diff
changeset
|
5938 {name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what |
|
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2236
diff
changeset
|
5939 is used internally. |
|
2236
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5940 Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|. |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5941 When compiled without the +persistent_undo option this always |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5942 returns an empty string. |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
5943 |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5944 undotree() *undotree()* |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5945 Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5946 the following items: |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5947 "seq_last" The highest undo sequence number used. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5948 "seq_cur" The sequence number of the current position in |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5949 the undo tree. This differs from "seq_last" |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5950 when some changes were undone. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5951 "time_cur" Time last used for |:earlier| and related |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5952 commands. Use |strftime()| to convert to |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5953 something readable. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5954 "save_last" Number of the last file write. Zero when no |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5955 write yet. |
|
2281
e41433ea71df
Added ":earlier 1f" and ":later 1f".
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2280
diff
changeset
|
5956 "save_cur" Number of the current position in the undo |
|
e41433ea71df
Added ":earlier 1f" and ":later 1f".
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2280
diff
changeset
|
5957 tree. |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5958 "synced" Non-zero when the last undo block was synced. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5959 This happens when waiting from input from the |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5960 user. See |undo-blocks|. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5961 "entries" A list of dictionaries with information about |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5962 undo blocks. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5963 |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5964 The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5965 Each List item is a Dictionary with these items: |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5966 "seq" Undo sequence number. Same as what appears in |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5967 |:undolist|. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5968 "time" Timestamp when the change happened. Use |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5969 |strftime()| to convert to something readable. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5970 "newhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5971 that was added. This marks the last change |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5972 and where further changes will be added. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5973 "curhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5974 that was undone. This marks the current |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5975 position in the undo tree, the block that will |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5976 be used by a redo command. When nothing was |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5977 undone after the last change this item will |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5978 not appear anywhere. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5979 "save" Only appears on the last block before a file |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5980 write. The number is the write count. The |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5981 first write has number 1, the last one the |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5982 "save_last" mentioned above. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5983 "alt" Alternate entry. This is again a List of undo |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5984 blocks. Each item may again have an "alt" |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5985 item. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
5986 |
| 140 | 5987 values({dict}) *values()* |
| 1621 | 5988 Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is |
| 685 | 5989 in arbitrary order. |
| 140 | 5990 |
| 5991 | |
| 7 | 5992 virtcol({expr}) *virtcol()* |
| 5993 The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file | |
| 5994 position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position | |
| 5995 occupied by the character at that position, when the screen | |
| 5996 would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the | |
| 5997 position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of | |
| 5998 the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts' | |
| 5999 set to 8, it returns 8. | |
| 1317 | 6000 For the byte position use |col()|. |
| 6001 For the use of {expr} see |col()|. | |
| 6002 When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where | |
| 703 | 6003 "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the |
| 1266 | 6004 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last |
| 2965 | 6005 character. When "off" is omitted zero is used. |
| 7 | 6006 When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position |
| 6007 beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'| | |
| 6008 The accepted positions are: | |
| 6009 . the cursor position | |
| 6010 $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the | |
| 6011 number of displayed characters in the cursor line | |
| 6012 plus one) | |
| 6013 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is | |
| 6014 returned) | |
| 6015 Note that only marks in the current file can be used. | |
| 6016 Examples: > | |
| 6017 virtcol(".") with text "foo^Lbar", with cursor on the "^L", returns 5 | |
| 6018 virtcol("$") with text "foo^Lbar", returns 9 | |
| 1621 | 6019 virtcol("'t") with text " there", with 't at 'h', returns 6 |
| 6020 < The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error. | |
| 1156 | 6021 A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of |
| 6022 all lines: > | |
| 6023 echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])")) | |
| 6024 | |
| 7 | 6025 |
| 6026 visualmode([expr]) *visualmode()* | |
| 6027 The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode | |
| 856 | 6028 used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty |
| 6029 string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v", | |
| 6030 "V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for | |
| 6031 character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode | |
| 6032 respectively. | |
| 7 | 6033 Example: > |
| 6034 :exe "normal " . visualmode() | |
| 6035 < This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful | |
| 6036 in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the | |
| 6037 Visual mode that was used. | |
| 1621 | 6038 If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode |
| 6039 (e.g., in a |:vmap|). | |
| 1661 | 6040 *non-zero-arg* |
| 6041 If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or | |
| 6042 a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and | |
| 1621 | 6043 the old value is returned. Note that " " and "0" are also |
| 1661 | 6044 non-empty strings, thus cause the mode to be cleared. A List, |
| 6045 Dictionary or Float is not a Number or String, thus does not | |
| 6046 cause the mode to be cleared. | |
| 7 | 6047 |
| 6048 *winbufnr()* | |
| 6049 winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer | |
| 236 | 6050 associated with window {nr}. When {nr} is zero, the number of |
| 7 | 6051 the buffer in the current window is returned. When window |
| 6052 {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. | |
| 6053 Example: > | |
| 6054 :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0)) | |
| 6055 < | |
| 6056 *wincol()* | |
| 6057 wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the | |
| 6058 cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the | |
| 6059 left side of the window. The leftmost column is one. | |
| 6060 | |
| 6061 winheight({nr}) *winheight()* | |
| 6062 The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}. | |
| 6063 When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is | |
| 6064 returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. | |
| 6065 An existing window always has a height of zero or more. | |
| 6066 Examples: > | |
| 6067 :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines." | |
| 6068 < | |
| 6069 *winline()* | |
| 6070 winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor | |
| 1621 | 6071 in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of |
| 7 | 6072 the window. The first line is one. |
| 531 | 6073 If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated |
| 6074 first, this may cause a scroll. | |
| 7 | 6075 |
| 6076 *winnr()* | |
| 20 | 6077 winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current |
| 6078 window. The top window has number 1. | |
| 6079 When the optional argument is "$", the number of the | |
| 674 | 6080 last window is returned (the window count). |
| 20 | 6081 When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last |
| 6082 accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to). | |
| 1156 | 6083 If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0 |
| 6084 is returned. | |
| 20 | 6085 The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" |
| 6086 |:wincmd|. | |
| 1156 | 6087 Also see |tabpagewinnr()|. |
| 7 | 6088 |
| 6089 *winrestcmd()* | |
| 6090 winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore | |
| 6091 the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows | |
| 712 | 6092 are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is |
| 6093 unchanged. | |
| 7 | 6094 Example: > |
| 6095 :let cmd = winrestcmd() | |
| 6096 :call MessWithWindowSizes() | |
| 6097 :exe cmd | |
| 712 | 6098 < |
| 6099 *winrestview()* | |
| 6100 winrestview({dict}) | |
| 6101 Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore | |
| 6102 the view of the current window. | |
| 6103 If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable. | |
| 6104 If the window size changed the result won't be the same. | |
| 6105 | |
| 6106 *winsaveview()* | |
| 6107 winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore | |
| 6108 the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to | |
| 6109 restore the view. | |
| 6110 This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the | |
| 6111 buffer and you want to go back to the original view. | |
| 6112 This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable' | |
| 798 | 6113 option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are |
| 6114 not opened when moving around. | |
| 712 | 6115 The return value includes: |
| 6116 lnum cursor line number | |
| 6117 col cursor column | |
| 6118 coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit' | |
| 6119 curswant column for vertical movement | |
| 6120 topline first line in the window | |
| 6121 topfill filler lines, only in diff mode | |
| 6122 leftcol first column displayed | |
| 6123 skipcol columns skipped | |
| 6124 Note that no option values are saved. | |
| 6125 | |
| 7 | 6126 |
| 6127 winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()* | |
| 6128 The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}. | |
| 6129 When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is | |
| 6130 returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. | |
| 6131 An existing window always has a width of zero or more. | |
| 6132 Examples: > | |
| 6133 :echo "The current window has " . winwidth(0) . " columns." | |
| 6134 :if winwidth(0) <= 50 | |
| 6135 : exe "normal 50\<C-W>|" | |
| 6136 :endif | |
| 6137 < | |
| 158 | 6138 *writefile()* |
| 6139 writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}]) | |
| 685 | 6140 Write |List| {list} to file {fname}. Each list item is |
| 158 | 6141 separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String or |
| 6142 Number. | |
| 6143 When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used: There will | |
| 6144 not be a NL after the last list item. An empty item at the | |
| 6145 end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL. | |
| 6146 All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character. | |
| 6147 Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list} | |
| 6148 to writefile(). | |
| 6149 An existing file is overwritten, if possible. | |
| 6150 When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an | |
| 6151 error message if the file can't be created or when writing | |
| 6152 fails. | |
| 6153 Also see |readfile()|. | |
| 6154 To copy a file byte for byte: > | |
| 6155 :let fl = readfile("foo", "b") | |
| 6156 :call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b") | |
| 3214 | 6157 |
| 6158 | |
| 6159 xor({expr}, {expr}) *xor()* | |
| 6160 Bitwise XOR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted | |
| 6161 to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. | |
| 6162 Example: > | |
| 6163 :let bits = xor(bits, 0x80) | |
| 3256 | 6164 < |
| 3214 | 6165 |
| 7 | 6166 |
| 6167 *feature-list* | |
| 6168 There are three types of features: | |
| 6169 1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim | |
| 6170 was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: > | |
| 6171 :if has("cindent") | |
| 6172 2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met. | |
| 6173 Example: > | |
| 6174 :if has("gui_running") | |
| 6175 < *has-patch* | |
| 6176 3. Included patches. First check |v:version| for the version of Vim. | |
| 6177 Then the "patch123" feature means that patch 123 has been included for | |
| 6178 this version. Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): > | |
| 6179 :if v:version > 602 || v:version == 602 && has("patch148") | |
| 1156 | 6180 < Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is |
| 6181 included. | |
| 7 | 6182 |
| 6183 all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled. | |
| 6184 amiga Amiga version of Vim. | |
| 6185 arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|. | |
| 6186 arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga). | |
| 613 | 6187 autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. |autocommand| |
| 7 | 6188 balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support. |
| 435 | 6189 balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons. |
| 7 | 6190 beos BeOS version of Vim. |
| 6191 browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will | |
| 6192 work. | |
| 6193 builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals. | |
| 6194 byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline' | |
| 6195 cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support. | |
| 6196 clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|. | |
| 6197 clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support. | |
| 6198 cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support. | |
| 6199 cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support. | |
| 6200 cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support. | |
| 6201 comments Compiled with |'comments'| support. | |
| 2681 | 6202 compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible. |
| 7 | 6203 cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|. |
| 6204 cscope Compiled with |cscope| support. | |
| 6205 debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined. | |
| 6206 dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support. | |
| 6207 dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support. | |
| 6208 diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support. | |
| 6209 digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs. | |
| 6210 dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|. | |
| 2681 | 6211 dos16 16 bits DOS version of Vim. |
| 7 | 6212 dos32 32 bits DOS (DJGPP) version of Vim. |
| 6213 ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set. | |
| 6214 emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags. | |
| 6215 eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always | |
| 6216 true, of course! | |
| 6217 ex_extra Compiled with extra Ex commands |+ex_extra|. | |
| 6218 extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and | |
| 6219 |'hlsearch'| | |
| 6220 farsi Compiled with Farsi support |farsi|. | |
| 6221 file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>| | |
| 168 | 6222 filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell |
| 6223 read/write/filter commands | |
| 7 | 6224 find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches |
| 6225 |+find_in_path|. | |
| 1621 | 6226 float Compiled with support for |Float|. |
| 7 | 6227 fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga, MS-DOS, and |
| 6228 Windows this is not present). | |
| 6229 folding Compiled with |folding| support. | |
| 6230 footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer| | |
| 6231 fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system(). | |
| 6232 gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang| | |
| 6233 gui Compiled with GUI enabled. | |
| 6234 gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI. | |
| 2681 | 6235 gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined). |
| 7 | 6236 gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version). |
| 6237 gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined). | |
| 6238 gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI. | |
| 6239 gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI. | |
| 6240 gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI. | |
| 2681 | 6241 gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon. |
| 7 | 6242 gui_win32 Compiled with MS Windows Win32 GUI. |
| 6243 gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1) | |
| 6244 hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul| | |
| 6245 iconv Can use iconv() for conversion. | |
| 6246 insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in | |
| 6247 Insert mode. | |
| 6248 jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support. | |
| 6249 keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support. | |
| 6250 langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support. | |
| 6251 libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support. | |
| 6252 linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat' and 'showbreak' | |
| 6253 support. | |
| 6254 lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting. | |
| 6255 listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files| | |
| 6256 and the argument list |arglist|. | |
| 6257 localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local| | |
|
2320
966a5609669e
Added Lua interfae. (Luis Carvalho)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2290
diff
changeset
|
6258 lua Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|. |
| 7 | 6259 mac Macintosh version of Vim. |
| 6260 macunix Macintosh version of Vim, using Unix files (OS-X). | |
| 6261 menu Compiled with support for |:menu|. | |
| 6262 mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|. | |
| 6263 modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers| | |
| 6264 mouse Compiled with support mouse. | |
| 6265 mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse. | |
| 6266 mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse) | |
| 6267 mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse. | |
| 6268 mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse. | |
| 1621 | 6269 mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse) |
| 3224 | 6270 mouse_urxvt Compiled with support for urxvt mouse. |
| 7 | 6271 mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse. |
| 2681 | 6272 mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'. |
| 1768 | 6273 multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding' |
| 6274 multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding. | |
| 7 | 6275 multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method. |
| 6276 multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages. | |
| 14 | 6277 mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|. |
| 2681 | 6278 netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected. |
| 7 | 6279 netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|. |
| 6280 ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32. | |
| 6281 os2 OS/2 version of Vim. | |
| 6282 path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags' | |
| 6283 perl Compiled with Perl interface. | |
|
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2210
diff
changeset
|
6284 persistent_undo Compiled with support for persistent undo history. |
| 7 | 6285 postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing. |
| 6286 printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support. | |
| 170 | 6287 profile Compiled with |:profile| support. |
| 2826 | 6288 python Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python| |
| 6289 python3 Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python| | |
| 7 | 6290 qnx QNX version of Vim. |
| 6291 quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support. | |
| 857 | 6292 reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support. |
| 7 | 6293 rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support. |
| 6294 ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|. | |
| 6295 scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. | |
| 6296 showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support. | |
| 6297 signs Compiled with |:sign| support. | |
| 6298 smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support. | |
| 9 | 6299 sniff Compiled with SNiFF interface support. |
| 2681 | 6300 spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|. |
| 1989 | 6301 startuptime Compiled with |--startuptime| support. |
| 7 | 6302 statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat' |
| 6303 and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'. | |
| 6304 sun_workshop Compiled with support for Sun |workshop|. | |
| 314 | 6305 syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|. |
| 7 | 6306 syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the |
| 6307 current buffer. | |
| 6308 system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec(). | |
| 6309 tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files | |
| 6310 |tag-binary-search|. | |
| 6311 tag_old_static Compiled with support for old static tags | |
| 6312 |tag-old-static|. | |
| 6313 tag_any_white Compiled with support for any white characters in tags | |
| 6314 files |tag-any-white|. | |
| 6315 tcl Compiled with Tcl interface. | |
| 6316 terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap. | |
| 6317 termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|. | |
| 6318 textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|. | |
| 6319 tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap | |
| 6320 or terminfo file. | |
| 6321 title Compiled with window title support |'title'|. | |
| 6322 toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|. | |
| 6323 unix Unix version of Vim. | |
| 6324 user_commands User-defined commands. | |
| 2681 | 6325 vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|. |
| 2581 | 6326 vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup| |
| 2681 | 6327 viminfo Compiled with viminfo support. |
| 7 | 6328 virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. |
| 6329 visual Compiled with Visual mode. | |
| 6330 visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. | |
| 6331 |blockwise-operators|. | |
| 6332 vms VMS version of Vim. | |
| 6333 vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. | |
| 6334 wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option. | |
| 6335 wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option. | |
| 6336 win16 Win16 version of Vim (MS-Windows 3.1). | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
6337 win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or |
|
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
6338 64 bits) |
| 2681 | 6339 win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin) |
| 7 | 6340 win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit). |
| 6341 win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME. | |
| 2681 | 6342 winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option. |
| 6343 windows Compiled with support for more than one window. | |
| 7 | 6344 writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on. |
| 6345 xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|. | |
| 6346 xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|. | |
| 3256 | 6347 xpm_w32 Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. |
| 7 | 6348 xsmp Compiled with X session management support. |
| 6349 xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support. | |
| 6350 xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard. | |
| 6351 xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the | |
| 6352 xterm screen. | |
| 6353 x11 Compiled with X11 support. | |
| 6354 | |
| 6355 *string-match* | |
| 6356 Matching a pattern in a String | |
| 6357 | |
| 6358 A regexp pattern as explained at |pattern| is normally used to find a match in | |
| 6359 the buffer lines. When a pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost | |
| 6360 everything works in the same way. The difference is that a String is handled | |
| 6361 like it is one line. When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a | |
| 6362 line break for the pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or | |
| 6363 with ".". Example: > | |
| 6364 :let a = "aaaa\nxxxx" | |
| 6365 :echo matchstr(a, "..\n..") | |
| 6366 aa | |
| 6367 xx | |
| 6368 :echo matchstr(a, "a.x") | |
| 6369 a | |
| 6370 x | |
| 6371 | |
| 6372 Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and | |
| 6373 "$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a | |
| 6374 "\n". | |
| 6375 | |
| 6376 ============================================================================== | |
| 6377 5. Defining functions *user-functions* | |
| 6378 | |
| 6379 New functions can be defined. These can be called just like builtin | |
| 6380 functions. The function executes a sequence of Ex commands. Normal mode | |
| 6381 commands can be executed with the |:normal| command. | |
| 6382 | |
| 6383 The function name must start with an uppercase letter, to avoid confusion with | |
| 6384 builtin functions. To prevent from using the same name in different scripts | |
| 6385 avoid obvious, short names. A good habit is to start the function name with | |
| 6386 the name of the script, e.g., "HTMLcolor()". | |
| 6387 | |
| 504 | 6388 It's also possible to use curly braces, see |curly-braces-names|. And the |
| 6389 |autoload| facility is useful to define a function only when it's called. | |
| 7 | 6390 |
| 6391 *local-function* | |
| 6392 A function local to a script must start with "s:". A local script function | |
| 6393 can only be called from within the script and from functions, user commands | |
| 6394 and autocommands defined in the script. It is also possible to call the | |
| 1698 | 6395 function from a mapping defined in the script, but then |<SID>| must be used |
| 7 | 6396 instead of "s:" when the mapping is expanded outside of the script. |
| 6397 | |
| 6398 *:fu* *:function* *E128* *E129* *E123* | |
| 6399 :fu[nction] List all functions and their arguments. | |
| 6400 | |
| 6401 :fu[nction] {name} List function {name}. | |
| 685 | 6402 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a |
| 6403 |Funcref|: > | |
| 114 | 6404 :function dict.init |
| 504 | 6405 |
| 6406 :fu[nction] /{pattern} List functions with a name matching {pattern}. | |
| 6407 Example that lists all functions ending with "File": > | |
| 6408 :function /File$ | |
| 482 | 6409 < |
| 6410 *:function-verbose* | |
| 6411 When 'verbose' is non-zero, listing a function will also display where it was | |
| 6412 last defined. Example: > | |
| 6413 | |
| 6414 :verbose function SetFileTypeSH | |
| 6415 function SetFileTypeSH(name) | |
| 6416 Last set from /usr/share/vim/vim-7.0/filetype.vim | |
| 6417 < | |
| 484 | 6418 See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. |
| 482 | 6419 |
| 3153 | 6420 *E124* *E125* *E853* |
| 102 | 6421 :fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict] |
| 7 | 6422 Define a new function by the name {name}. The name |
| 6423 must be made of alphanumeric characters and '_', and | |
| 6424 must start with a capital or "s:" (see above). | |
| 114 | 6425 |
| 685 | 6426 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a |
| 6427 |Funcref|: > | |
| 114 | 6428 :function dict.init(arg) |
| 1621 | 6429 < "dict" must be an existing dictionary. The entry |
| 114 | 6430 "init" is added if it didn't exist yet. Otherwise [!] |
| 1621 | 6431 is required to overwrite an existing function. The |
| 114 | 6432 result is a |Funcref| to a numbered function. The |
| 6433 function can only be used with a |Funcref| and will be | |
| 6434 deleted if there are no more references to it. | |
| 7 | 6435 *E127* *E122* |
| 6436 When a function by this name already exists and [!] is | |
| 6437 not used an error message is given. When [!] is used, | |
| 6438 an existing function is silently replaced. Unless it | |
| 6439 is currently being executed, that is an error. | |
| 133 | 6440 |
| 6441 For the {arguments} see |function-argument|. | |
| 6442 | |
| 7 | 6443 *a:firstline* *a:lastline* |
| 6444 When the [range] argument is added, the function is | |
| 6445 expected to take care of a range itself. The range is | |
| 6446 passed as "a:firstline" and "a:lastline". If [range] | |
| 6447 is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for | |
| 6448 each line in the range, with the cursor on the start | |
| 6449 of each line. See |function-range-example|. | |
| 114 | 6450 |
| 7 | 6451 When the [abort] argument is added, the function will |
| 6452 abort as soon as an error is detected. | |
| 114 | 6453 |
| 102 | 6454 When the [dict] argument is added, the function must |
| 1621 | 6455 be invoked through an entry in a |Dictionary|. The |
| 102 | 6456 local variable "self" will then be set to the |
| 6457 dictionary. See |Dictionary-function|. | |
| 7 | 6458 |
| 1621 | 6459 *function-search-undo* |
| 653 | 6460 The last used search pattern and the redo command "." |
| 1621 | 6461 will not be changed by the function. This also |
| 6462 implies that the effect of |:nohlsearch| is undone | |
| 6463 when the function returns. | |
| 653 | 6464 |
| 7 | 6465 *:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193* |
| 6466 :endf[unction] The end of a function definition. Must be on a line | |
| 6467 by its own, without other commands. | |
| 6468 | |
| 6469 *:delf* *:delfunction* *E130* *E131* | |
| 6470 :delf[unction] {name} Delete function {name}. | |
| 685 | 6471 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a |
| 6472 |Funcref|: > | |
| 114 | 6473 :delfunc dict.init |
| 1621 | 6474 < This will remove the "init" entry from "dict". The |
| 114 | 6475 function is deleted if there are no more references to |
| 6476 it. | |
| 7 | 6477 *:retu* *:return* *E133* |
| 6478 :retu[rn] [expr] Return from a function. When "[expr]" is given, it is | |
| 6479 evaluated and returned as the result of the function. | |
| 6480 If "[expr]" is not given, the number 0 is returned. | |
| 6481 When a function ends without an explicit ":return", | |
| 6482 the number 0 is returned. | |
| 6483 Note that there is no check for unreachable lines, | |
| 6484 thus there is no warning if commands follow ":return". | |
| 6485 | |
| 6486 If the ":return" is used after a |:try| but before the | |
| 6487 matching |:finally| (if present), the commands | |
| 6488 following the ":finally" up to the matching |:endtry| | |
| 6489 are executed first. This process applies to all | |
| 6490 nested ":try"s inside the function. The function | |
| 6491 returns at the outermost ":endtry". | |
| 6492 | |
| 133 | 6493 *function-argument* *a:var* |
| 1621 | 6494 An argument can be defined by giving its name. In the function this can then |
| 133 | 6495 be used as "a:name" ("a:" for argument). |
| 1156 | 6496 *a:0* *a:1* *a:000* *E740* *...* |
| 133 | 6497 Up to 20 arguments can be given, separated by commas. After the named |
| 6498 arguments an argument "..." can be specified, which means that more arguments | |
| 6499 may optionally be following. In the function the extra arguments can be used | |
| 6500 as "a:1", "a:2", etc. "a:0" is set to the number of extra arguments (which | |
| 685 | 6501 can be 0). "a:000" is set to a |List| that contains these arguments. Note |
| 6502 that "a:1" is the same as "a:000[0]". | |
| 148 | 6503 *E742* |
| 6504 The a: scope and the variables in it cannot be changed, they are fixed. | |
| 1698 | 6505 However, if a |List| or |Dictionary| is used, you can change their contents. |
| 685 | 6506 Thus you can pass a |List| to a function and have the function add an item to |
| 6507 it. If you want to make sure the function cannot change a |List| or | |
| 6508 |Dictionary| use |:lockvar|. | |
| 133 | 6509 |
| 6510 When not using "...", the number of arguments in a function call must be equal | |
| 6511 to the number of named arguments. When using "...", the number of arguments | |
| 6512 may be larger. | |
| 6513 | |
| 6514 It is also possible to define a function without any arguments. You must | |
| 6515 still supply the () then. The body of the function follows in the next lines, | |
| 6516 until the matching |:endfunction|. It is allowed to define another function | |
| 6517 inside a function body. | |
| 6518 | |
| 6519 *local-variables* | |
| 7 | 6520 Inside a function variables can be used. These are local variables, which |
| 6521 will disappear when the function returns. Global variables need to be | |
| 6522 accessed with "g:". | |
| 6523 | |
| 6524 Example: > | |
| 6525 :function Table(title, ...) | |
| 6526 : echohl Title | |
| 6527 : echo a:title | |
| 6528 : echohl None | |
| 140 | 6529 : echo a:0 . " items:" |
| 6530 : for s in a:000 | |
| 6531 : echon ' ' . s | |
| 6532 : endfor | |
| 7 | 6533 :endfunction |
| 6534 | |
| 6535 This function can then be called with: > | |
| 140 | 6536 call Table("Table", "line1", "line2") |
| 6537 call Table("Empty Table") | |
| 7 | 6538 |
| 1156 | 6539 To return more than one value, return a |List|: > |
| 6540 :function Compute(n1, n2) | |
| 7 | 6541 : if a:n2 == 0 |
| 1156 | 6542 : return ["fail", 0] |
| 7 | 6543 : endif |
| 1156 | 6544 : return ["ok", a:n1 / a:n2] |
| 7 | 6545 :endfunction |
| 6546 | |
| 6547 This function can then be called with: > | |
| 1156 | 6548 :let [success, div] = Compute(102, 6) |
| 7 | 6549 :if success == "ok" |
| 6550 : echo div | |
| 6551 :endif | |
| 1156 | 6552 < |
| 786 | 6553 *:cal* *:call* *E107* *E117* |
| 7 | 6554 :[range]cal[l] {name}([arguments]) |
| 6555 Call a function. The name of the function and its arguments | |
| 6556 are as specified with |:function|. Up to 20 arguments can be | |
| 1156 | 6557 used. The returned value is discarded. |
| 7 | 6558 Without a range and for functions that accept a range, the |
| 6559 function is called once. When a range is given the cursor is | |
| 6560 positioned at the start of the first line before executing the | |
| 6561 function. | |
| 6562 When a range is given and the function doesn't handle it | |
| 6563 itself, the function is executed for each line in the range, | |
| 6564 with the cursor in the first column of that line. The cursor | |
| 6565 is left at the last line (possibly moved by the last function | |
| 1621 | 6566 call). The arguments are re-evaluated for each line. Thus |
| 7 | 6567 this works: |
| 6568 *function-range-example* > | |
| 6569 :function Mynumber(arg) | |
| 6570 : echo line(".") . " " . a:arg | |
| 6571 :endfunction | |
| 6572 :1,5call Mynumber(getline(".")) | |
| 6573 < | |
| 6574 The "a:firstline" and "a:lastline" are defined anyway, they | |
| 6575 can be used to do something different at the start or end of | |
| 6576 the range. | |
| 6577 | |
| 6578 Example of a function that handles the range itself: > | |
| 6579 | |
| 6580 :function Cont() range | |
| 6581 : execute (a:firstline + 1) . "," . a:lastline . 's/^/\t\\ ' | |
| 6582 :endfunction | |
| 6583 :4,8call Cont() | |
| 6584 < | |
| 6585 This function inserts the continuation character "\" in front | |
| 6586 of all the lines in the range, except the first one. | |
| 6587 | |
| 1156 | 6588 When the function returns a composite value it can be further |
| 6589 dereferenced, but the range will not be used then. Example: > | |
| 6590 :4,8call GetDict().method() | |
| 6591 < Here GetDict() gets the range but method() does not. | |
| 6592 | |
| 7 | 6593 *E132* |
| 6594 The recursiveness of user functions is restricted with the |'maxfuncdepth'| | |
| 6595 option. | |
| 6596 | |
| 161 | 6597 |
| 6598 AUTOMATICALLY LOADING FUNCTIONS ~ | |
| 7 | 6599 *autoload-functions* |
| 6600 When using many or large functions, it's possible to automatically define them | |
| 161 | 6601 only when they are used. There are two methods: with an autocommand and with |
| 6602 the "autoload" directory in 'runtimepath'. | |
| 6603 | |
| 6604 | |
| 6605 Using an autocommand ~ | |
| 6606 | |
| 170 | 6607 This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.14|. |
| 6608 | |
| 161 | 6609 The autocommand is useful if you have a plugin that is a long Vim script file. |
| 6610 You can define the autocommand and quickly quit the script with |:finish|. | |
| 1621 | 6611 That makes Vim startup faster. The autocommand should then load the same file |
| 161 | 6612 again, setting a variable to skip the |:finish| command. |
| 6613 | |
| 6614 Use the FuncUndefined autocommand event with a pattern that matches the | |
| 6615 function(s) to be defined. Example: > | |
| 7 | 6616 |
| 6617 :au FuncUndefined BufNet* source ~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim | |
| 6618 | |
| 6619 The file "~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim" should then define functions that start with | |
| 6620 "BufNet". Also see |FuncUndefined|. | |
| 6621 | |
| 161 | 6622 |
| 6623 Using an autoload script ~ | |
| 168 | 6624 *autoload* *E746* |
| 170 | 6625 This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.15|. |
| 6626 | |
| 161 | 6627 Using a script in the "autoload" directory is simpler, but requires using |
| 6628 exactly the right file name. A function that can be autoloaded has a name | |
| 6629 like this: > | |
| 6630 | |
| 270 | 6631 :call filename#funcname() |
| 161 | 6632 |
| 6633 When such a function is called, and it is not defined yet, Vim will search the | |
| 6634 "autoload" directories in 'runtimepath' for a script file called | |
| 6635 "filename.vim". For example "~/.vim/autoload/filename.vim". That file should | |
| 6636 then define the function like this: > | |
| 6637 | |
| 270 | 6638 function filename#funcname() |
| 161 | 6639 echo "Done!" |
| 6640 endfunction | |
| 6641 | |
| 530 | 6642 The file name and the name used before the # in the function must match |
| 161 | 6643 exactly, and the defined function must have the name exactly as it will be |
| 6644 called. | |
| 6645 | |
| 270 | 6646 It is possible to use subdirectories. Every # in the function name works like |
| 6647 a path separator. Thus when calling a function: > | |
| 6648 | |
| 6649 :call foo#bar#func() | |
| 161 | 6650 |
| 6651 Vim will look for the file "autoload/foo/bar.vim" in 'runtimepath'. | |
| 6652 | |
| 168 | 6653 This also works when reading a variable that has not been set yet: > |
| 6654 | |
| 270 | 6655 :let l = foo#bar#lvar |
| 168 | 6656 |
| 557 | 6657 However, when the autoload script was already loaded it won't be loaded again |
| 6658 for an unknown variable. | |
| 6659 | |
| 168 | 6660 When assigning a value to such a variable nothing special happens. This can |
| 6661 be used to pass settings to the autoload script before it's loaded: > | |
| 6662 | |
| 270 | 6663 :let foo#bar#toggle = 1 |
| 6664 :call foo#bar#func() | |
| 168 | 6665 |
| 164 | 6666 Note that when you make a mistake and call a function that is supposed to be |
| 6667 defined in an autoload script, but the script doesn't actually define the | |
| 6668 function, the script will be sourced every time you try to call the function. | |
| 168 | 6669 And you will get an error message every time. |
| 6670 | |
| 6671 Also note that if you have two script files, and one calls a function in the | |
| 1621 | 6672 other and vice versa, before the used function is defined, it won't work. |
| 168 | 6673 Avoid using the autoload functionality at the toplevel. |
| 161 | 6674 |
| 794 | 6675 Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the |
| 6676 |vimball| utility. Also read the user manual |distribute-script|. | |
| 6677 | |
| 7 | 6678 ============================================================================== |
| 6679 6. Curly braces names *curly-braces-names* | |
| 6680 | |
| 6681 Wherever you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name" variable. | |
| 6682 This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions wrapped in braces | |
| 6683 {} like this: > | |
| 6684 my_{adjective}_variable | |
| 6685 | |
| 6686 When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts | |
| 6687 that in place of the expression, and re-interprets the whole as a variable | |
| 6688 name. So in the above example, if the variable "adjective" was set to | |
| 6689 "noisy", then the reference would be to "my_noisy_variable", whereas if | |
| 6690 "adjective" was set to "quiet", then it would be to "my_quiet_variable". | |
| 6691 | |
| 6692 One application for this is to create a set of variables governed by an option | |
| 1621 | 6693 value. For example, the statement > |
| 7 | 6694 echo my_{&background}_message |
| 6695 | |
| 6696 would output the contents of "my_dark_message" or "my_light_message" depending | |
| 6697 on the current value of 'background'. | |
| 6698 | |
| 6699 You can use multiple brace pairs: > | |
| 6700 echo my_{adverb}_{adjective}_message | |
| 6701 ..or even nest them: > | |
| 6702 echo my_{ad{end_of_word}}_message | |
| 6703 where "end_of_word" is either "verb" or "jective". | |
| 6704 | |
| 6705 However, the expression inside the braces must evaluate to a valid single | |
| 236 | 6706 variable name, e.g. this is invalid: > |
| 7 | 6707 :let foo='a + b' |
| 6708 :echo c{foo}d | |
| 6709 .. since the result of expansion is "ca + bd", which is not a variable name. | |
| 6710 | |
| 6711 *curly-braces-function-names* | |
| 6712 You can call and define functions by an evaluated name in a similar way. | |
| 6713 Example: > | |
| 6714 :let func_end='whizz' | |
| 6715 :call my_func_{func_end}(parameter) | |
| 6716 | |
| 6717 This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)". | |
| 6718 | |
| 6719 ============================================================================== | |
| 6720 7. Commands *expression-commands* | |
| 6721 | |
| 6722 :let {var-name} = {expr1} *:let* *E18* | |
| 6723 Set internal variable {var-name} to the result of the | |
| 6724 expression {expr1}. The variable will get the type | |
| 6725 from the {expr}. If {var-name} didn't exist yet, it | |
| 6726 is created. | |
| 6727 | |
| 85 | 6728 :let {var-name}[{idx}] = {expr1} *E689* |
| 6729 Set a list item to the result of the expression | |
| 6730 {expr1}. {var-name} must refer to a list and {idx} | |
| 6731 must be a valid index in that list. For nested list | |
| 6732 the index can be repeated. | |
| 1621 | 6733 This cannot be used to add an item to a |List|. |
| 6734 This cannot be used to set a byte in a String. You | |
| 6735 can do that like this: > | |
| 6736 :let var = var[0:2] . 'X' . var[4:] | |
| 6737 < | |
| 114 | 6738 *E711* *E719* |
| 6739 :let {var-name}[{idx1}:{idx2}] = {expr1} *E708* *E709* *E710* | |
| 685 | 6740 Set a sequence of items in a |List| to the result of |
| 6741 the expression {expr1}, which must be a list with the | |
| 87 | 6742 correct number of items. |
| 6743 {idx1} can be omitted, zero is used instead. | |
| 6744 {idx2} can be omitted, meaning the end of the list. | |
| 6745 When the selected range of items is partly past the | |
| 6746 end of the list, items will be added. | |
| 6747 | |
| 153 | 6748 *:let+=* *:let-=* *:let.=* *E734* |
| 114 | 6749 :let {var} += {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} + {expr1}". |
| 6750 :let {var} -= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} - {expr1}". | |
| 6751 :let {var} .= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} . {expr1}". | |
| 6752 These fail if {var} was not set yet and when the type | |
| 6753 of {var} and {expr1} don't fit the operator. | |
| 6754 | |
| 6755 | |
| 7 | 6756 :let ${env-name} = {expr1} *:let-environment* *:let-$* |
| 6757 Set environment variable {env-name} to the result of | |
| 6758 the expression {expr1}. The type is always String. | |
| 114 | 6759 :let ${env-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6760 Append {expr1} to the environment variable {env-name}. | |
| 6761 If the environment variable didn't exist yet this | |
| 6762 works like "=". | |
| 7 | 6763 |
| 6764 :let @{reg-name} = {expr1} *:let-register* *:let-@* | |
| 6765 Write the result of the expression {expr1} in register | |
| 6766 {reg-name}. {reg-name} must be a single letter, and | |
| 6767 must be the name of a writable register (see | |
| 6768 |registers|). "@@" can be used for the unnamed | |
| 6769 register, "@/" for the search pattern. | |
| 6770 If the result of {expr1} ends in a <CR> or <NL>, the | |
| 6771 register will be linewise, otherwise it will be set to | |
| 6772 characterwise. | |
| 6773 This can be used to clear the last search pattern: > | |
| 6774 :let @/ = "" | |
| 6775 < This is different from searching for an empty string, | |
| 6776 that would match everywhere. | |
| 6777 | |
| 114 | 6778 :let @{reg-name} .= {expr1} |
| 1621 | 6779 Append {expr1} to register {reg-name}. If the |
| 114 | 6780 register was empty it's like setting it to {expr1}. |
| 6781 | |
| 1156 | 6782 :let &{option-name} = {expr1} *:let-option* *:let-&* |
| 7 | 6783 Set option {option-name} to the result of the |
| 68 | 6784 expression {expr1}. A String or Number value is |
| 6785 always converted to the type of the option. | |
| 7 | 6786 For an option local to a window or buffer the effect |
| 6787 is just like using the |:set| command: both the local | |
| 555 | 6788 value and the global value are changed. |
| 68 | 6789 Example: > |
| 6790 :let &path = &path . ',/usr/local/include' | |
| 7 | 6791 |
| 114 | 6792 :let &{option-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6793 For a string option: Append {expr1} to the value. | |
| 6794 Does not insert a comma like |:set+=|. | |
| 6795 | |
| 6796 :let &{option-name} += {expr1} | |
| 6797 :let &{option-name} -= {expr1} | |
| 6798 For a number or boolean option: Add or subtract | |
| 6799 {expr1}. | |
| 6800 | |
| 7 | 6801 :let &l:{option-name} = {expr1} |
| 114 | 6802 :let &l:{option-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6803 :let &l:{option-name} += {expr1} | |
| 6804 :let &l:{option-name} -= {expr1} | |
| 7 | 6805 Like above, but only set the local value of an option |
| 6806 (if there is one). Works like |:setlocal|. | |
| 6807 | |
| 6808 :let &g:{option-name} = {expr1} | |
| 114 | 6809 :let &g:{option-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6810 :let &g:{option-name} += {expr1} | |
| 6811 :let &g:{option-name} -= {expr1} | |
| 7 | 6812 Like above, but only set the global value of an option |
| 6813 (if there is one). Works like |:setglobal|. | |
| 6814 | |
| 85 | 6815 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] = {expr1} *:let-unpack* *E687* *E688* |
| 685 | 6816 {expr1} must evaluate to a |List|. The first item in |
| 68 | 6817 the list is assigned to {name1}, the second item to |
| 6818 {name2}, etc. | |
| 6819 The number of names must match the number of items in | |
| 685 | 6820 the |List|. |
| 68 | 6821 Each name can be one of the items of the ":let" |
| 6822 command as mentioned above. | |
| 6823 Example: > | |
| 6824 :let [s, item] = GetItem(s) | |
| 114 | 6825 < Detail: {expr1} is evaluated first, then the |
| 6826 assignments are done in sequence. This matters if | |
| 6827 {name2} depends on {name1}. Example: > | |
| 6828 :let x = [0, 1] | |
| 6829 :let i = 0 | |
| 6830 :let [i, x[i]] = [1, 2] | |
| 6831 :echo x | |
| 6832 < The result is [0, 2]. | |
| 6833 | |
| 6834 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] .= {expr1} | |
| 6835 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] += {expr1} | |
| 6836 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] -= {expr1} | |
| 6837 Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each | |
| 685 | 6838 |List| item. |
| 68 | 6839 |
| 6840 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] = {expr1} | |
| 685 | 6841 Like |:let-unpack| above, but the |List| may have more |
| 114 | 6842 items than there are names. A list of the remaining |
| 6843 items is assigned to {lastname}. If there are no | |
| 6844 remaining items {lastname} is set to an empty list. | |
| 68 | 6845 Example: > |
| 6846 :let [a, b; rest] = ["aval", "bval", 3, 4] | |
| 6847 < | |
| 114 | 6848 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] .= {expr1} |
| 6849 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] += {expr1} | |
| 6850 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] -= {expr1} | |
| 6851 Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each | |
| 685 | 6852 |List| item. |
| 2596 | 6853 |
| 6854 *E121* | |
| 1621 | 6855 :let {var-name} .. List the value of variable {var-name}. Multiple |
| 123 | 6856 variable names may be given. Special names recognized |
| 6857 here: *E738* | |
| 777 | 6858 g: global variables |
| 6859 b: local buffer variables | |
| 6860 w: local window variables | |
| 819 | 6861 t: local tab page variables |
| 777 | 6862 s: script-local variables |
| 6863 l: local function variables | |
| 123 | 6864 v: Vim variables. |
| 7 | 6865 |
| 55 | 6866 :let List the values of all variables. The type of the |
| 6867 variable is indicated before the value: | |
| 6868 <nothing> String | |
| 6869 # Number | |
| 856 | 6870 * Funcref |
| 7 | 6871 |
| 148 | 6872 |
| 1156 | 6873 :unl[et][!] {name} ... *:unlet* *:unl* *E108* *E795* |
| 148 | 6874 Remove the internal variable {name}. Several variable |
| 6875 names can be given, they are all removed. The name | |
| 685 | 6876 may also be a |List| or |Dictionary| item. |
| 7 | 6877 With [!] no error message is given for non-existing |
| 6878 variables. | |
| 685 | 6879 One or more items from a |List| can be removed: > |
| 108 | 6880 :unlet list[3] " remove fourth item |
| 6881 :unlet list[3:] " remove fourth item to last | |
| 685 | 6882 < One item from a |Dictionary| can be removed at a time: > |
| 108 | 6883 :unlet dict['two'] |
| 6884 :unlet dict.two | |
| 1668 | 6885 < This is especially useful to clean up used global |
| 6886 variables and script-local variables (these are not | |
| 6887 deleted when the script ends). Function-local | |
| 6888 variables are automatically deleted when the function | |
| 6889 ends. | |
| 7 | 6890 |
| 148 | 6891 :lockv[ar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:lockvar* *:lockv* |
| 6892 Lock the internal variable {name}. Locking means that | |
| 6893 it can no longer be changed (until it is unlocked). | |
| 6894 A locked variable can be deleted: > | |
| 6895 :lockvar v | |
| 6896 :let v = 'asdf' " fails! | |
| 6897 :unlet v | |
| 6898 < *E741* | |
| 6899 If you try to change a locked variable you get an | |
| 6900 error message: "E741: Value of {name} is locked" | |
| 6901 | |
| 685 | 6902 [depth] is relevant when locking a |List| or |
| 6903 |Dictionary|. It specifies how deep the locking goes: | |
| 6904 1 Lock the |List| or |Dictionary| itself, | |
| 148 | 6905 cannot add or remove items, but can |
| 6906 still change their values. | |
| 6907 2 Also lock the values, cannot change | |
| 685 | 6908 the items. If an item is a |List| or |
| 6909 |Dictionary|, cannot add or remove | |
| 148 | 6910 items, but can still change the |
| 6911 values. | |
| 685 | 6912 3 Like 2 but for the |List| / |
| 6913 |Dictionary| in the |List| / | |
| 6914 |Dictionary|, one level deeper. | |
| 6915 The default [depth] is 2, thus when {name} is a |List| | |
| 6916 or |Dictionary| the values cannot be changed. | |
| 148 | 6917 *E743* |
| 6918 For unlimited depth use [!] and omit [depth]. | |
| 6919 However, there is a maximum depth of 100 to catch | |
| 6920 loops. | |
| 6921 | |
| 685 | 6922 Note that when two variables refer to the same |List| |
| 6923 and you lock one of them, the |List| will also be | |
| 819 | 6924 locked when used through the other variable. |
| 6925 Example: > | |
| 148 | 6926 :let l = [0, 1, 2, 3] |
| 6927 :let cl = l | |
| 6928 :lockvar l | |
| 6929 :let cl[1] = 99 " won't work! | |
| 6930 < You may want to make a copy of a list to avoid this. | |
| 6931 See |deepcopy()|. | |
| 6932 | |
| 6933 | |
| 6934 :unlo[ckvar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:unlockvar* *:unlo* | |
| 6935 Unlock the internal variable {name}. Does the | |
| 6936 opposite of |:lockvar|. | |
| 6937 | |
| 6938 | |
| 7 | 6939 :if {expr1} *:if* *:endif* *:en* *E171* *E579* *E580* |
| 6940 :en[dif] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else" | |
| 6941 or ":endif" if {expr1} evaluates to non-zero. | |
| 6942 | |
| 6943 From Vim version 4.5 until 5.0, every Ex command in | |
| 6944 between the ":if" and ":endif" is ignored. These two | |
| 6945 commands were just to allow for future expansions in a | |
| 6946 backwards compatible way. Nesting was allowed. Note | |
| 6947 that any ":else" or ":elseif" was ignored, the "else" | |
| 6948 part was not executed either. | |
| 6949 | |
| 6950 You can use this to remain compatible with older | |
| 6951 versions: > | |
| 6952 :if version >= 500 | |
| 6953 : version-5-specific-commands | |
| 6954 :endif | |
| 6955 < The commands still need to be parsed to find the | |
| 6956 "endif". Sometimes an older Vim has a problem with a | |
| 6957 new command. For example, ":silent" is recognized as | |
| 6958 a ":substitute" command. In that case ":execute" can | |
| 6959 avoid problems: > | |
| 6960 :if version >= 600 | |
| 6961 : execute "silent 1,$delete" | |
| 6962 :endif | |
| 6963 < | |
| 6964 NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work | |
| 6965 properly in between ":if" and ":endif". | |
| 6966 | |
| 6967 *:else* *:el* *E581* *E583* | |
| 6968 :el[se] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else" | |
| 6969 or ":endif" if they previously were not being | |
| 6970 executed. | |
| 6971 | |
| 6972 *:elseif* *:elsei* *E582* *E584* | |
| 6973 :elsei[f] {expr1} Short for ":else" ":if", with the addition that there | |
| 6974 is no extra ":endif". | |
| 6975 | |
| 6976 :wh[ile] {expr1} *:while* *:endwhile* *:wh* *:endw* | |
| 114 | 6977 *E170* *E585* *E588* *E733* |
| 7 | 6978 :endw[hile] Repeat the commands between ":while" and ":endwhile", |
| 6979 as long as {expr1} evaluates to non-zero. | |
| 6980 When an error is detected from a command inside the | |
| 6981 loop, execution continues after the "endwhile". | |
| 75 | 6982 Example: > |
| 6983 :let lnum = 1 | |
| 6984 :while lnum <= line("$") | |
| 6985 :call FixLine(lnum) | |
| 6986 :let lnum = lnum + 1 | |
| 6987 :endwhile | |
| 6988 < | |
| 7 | 6989 NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work |
| 99 | 6990 properly inside a ":while" and ":for" loop. |
| 75 | 6991 |
| 114 | 6992 :for {var} in {list} *:for* *E690* *E732* |
| 75 | 6993 :endfo[r] *:endfo* *:endfor* |
| 6994 Repeat the commands between ":for" and ":endfor" for | |
| 158 | 6995 each item in {list}. Variable {var} is set to the |
| 79 | 6996 value of each item. |
| 6997 When an error is detected for a command inside the | |
| 75 | 6998 loop, execution continues after the "endfor". |
| 464 | 6999 Changing {list} inside the loop affects what items are |
| 7000 used. Make a copy if this is unwanted: > | |
| 79 | 7001 :for item in copy(mylist) |
| 7002 < When not making a copy, Vim stores a reference to the | |
| 7003 next item in the list, before executing the commands | |
| 1621 | 7004 with the current item. Thus the current item can be |
| 79 | 7005 removed without effect. Removing any later item means |
| 7006 it will not be found. Thus the following example | |
| 7007 works (an inefficient way to make a list empty): > | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7008 for item in mylist |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7009 call remove(mylist, 0) |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7010 endfor |
| 87 | 7011 < Note that reordering the list (e.g., with sort() or |
| 7012 reverse()) may have unexpected effects. | |
| 7013 Note that the type of each list item should be | |
| 75 | 7014 identical to avoid errors for the type of {var} |
| 7015 changing. Unlet the variable at the end of the loop | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7016 to allow multiple item types: > |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7017 for item in ["foo", ["bar"]] |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7018 echo item |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7019 unlet item " E706 without this |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7020 endfor |
| 75 | 7021 |
| 7022 :for [{var1}, {var2}, ...] in {listlist} | |
| 7023 :endfo[r] | |
| 7024 Like ":for" above, but each item in {listlist} must be | |
| 7025 a list, of which each item is assigned to {var1}, | |
| 7026 {var2}, etc. Example: > | |
| 7027 :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 5], [3, 8]] | |
| 7028 :echo getline(lnum)[col] | |
| 7029 :endfor | |
| 7030 < | |
| 7 | 7031 *:continue* *:con* *E586* |
| 75 | 7032 :con[tinue] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, jumps back |
| 7033 to the start of the loop. | |
| 7034 If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but | |
| 7035 before the matching |:finally| (if present), the | |
| 7036 commands following the ":finally" up to the matching | |
| 7037 |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to | |
| 7038 all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost | |
| 7039 ":endtry" then jumps back to the start of the loop. | |
| 7 | 7040 |
| 7041 *:break* *:brea* *E587* | |
| 75 | 7042 :brea[k] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, skips to |
| 7043 the command after the matching ":endwhile" or | |
| 7044 ":endfor". | |
| 7045 If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but | |
| 7046 before the matching |:finally| (if present), the | |
| 7047 commands following the ":finally" up to the matching | |
| 7048 |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to | |
| 7049 all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost | |
| 7050 ":endtry" then jumps to the command after the loop. | |
| 7 | 7051 |
| 7052 :try *:try* *:endt* *:endtry* *E600* *E601* *E602* | |
| 7053 :endt[ry] Change the error handling for the commands between | |
| 7054 ":try" and ":endtry" including everything being | |
| 7055 executed across ":source" commands, function calls, | |
| 7056 or autocommand invocations. | |
| 7057 | |
| 7058 When an error or interrupt is detected and there is | |
| 7059 a |:finally| command following, execution continues | |
| 7060 after the ":finally". Otherwise, or when the | |
| 7061 ":endtry" is reached thereafter, the next | |
| 7062 (dynamically) surrounding ":try" is checked for | |
| 7063 a corresponding ":finally" etc. Then the script | |
| 7064 processing is terminated. (Whether a function | |
| 7065 definition has an "abort" argument does not matter.) | |
| 7066 Example: > | |
| 7067 :try | edit too much | finally | echo "cleanup" | endtry | |
| 7068 :echo "impossible" " not reached, script terminated above | |
| 7069 < | |
| 7070 Moreover, an error or interrupt (dynamically) inside | |
| 7071 ":try" and ":endtry" is converted to an exception. It | |
| 7072 can be caught as if it were thrown by a |:throw| | |
| 7073 command (see |:catch|). In this case, the script | |
| 7074 processing is not terminated. | |
| 7075 | |
| 7076 The value "Vim:Interrupt" is used for an interrupt | |
| 7077 exception. An error in a Vim command is converted | |
| 7078 to a value of the form "Vim({command}):{errmsg}", | |
| 7079 other errors are converted to a value of the form | |
| 7080 "Vim:{errmsg}". {command} is the full command name, | |
| 7081 and {errmsg} is the message that is displayed if the | |
| 7082 error exception is not caught, always beginning with | |
| 7083 the error number. | |
| 7084 Examples: > | |
| 7085 :try | sleep 100 | catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | endtry | |
| 7086 :try | edit | catch /^Vim(edit):E\d\+/ | echo "error" | endtry | |
| 7087 < | |
| 7088 *:cat* *:catch* *E603* *E604* *E605* | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7089 :cat[ch] /{pattern}/ The following commands until the next |:catch|, |
| 7 | 7090 |:finally|, or |:endtry| that belongs to the same |
| 7091 |:try| as the ":catch" are executed when an exception | |
| 7092 matching {pattern} is being thrown and has not yet | |
| 7093 been caught by a previous ":catch". Otherwise, these | |
| 7094 commands are skipped. | |
| 7095 When {pattern} is omitted all errors are caught. | |
| 7096 Examples: > | |
| 7097 :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ " catch interrupts (CTRL-C) | |
| 7098 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/ " catch all Vim errors | |
| 7099 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:/ " catch errors and interrupts | |
| 7100 :catch /^Vim(write):/ " catch all errors in :write | |
| 7101 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E123/ " catch error E123 | |
| 7102 :catch /my-exception/ " catch user exception | |
| 7103 :catch /.*/ " catch everything | |
| 7104 :catch " same as /.*/ | |
| 7105 < | |
| 7106 Another character can be used instead of / around the | |
| 7107 {pattern}, so long as it does not have a special | |
| 7108 meaning (e.g., '|' or '"') and doesn't occur inside | |
| 7109 {pattern}. | |
| 7110 NOTE: It is not reliable to ":catch" the TEXT of | |
| 7111 an error message because it may vary in different | |
| 7112 locales. | |
| 7113 | |
| 7114 *:fina* *:finally* *E606* *E607* | |
| 7115 :fina[lly] The following commands until the matching |:endtry| | |
| 7116 are executed whenever the part between the matching | |
| 7117 |:try| and the ":finally" is left: either by falling | |
| 7118 through to the ":finally" or by a |:continue|, | |
| 7119 |:break|, |:finish|, or |:return|, or by an error or | |
| 7120 interrupt or exception (see |:throw|). | |
| 7121 | |
| 7122 *:th* *:throw* *E608* | |
| 7123 :th[row] {expr1} The {expr1} is evaluated and thrown as an exception. | |
| 7124 If the ":throw" is used after a |:try| but before the | |
| 7125 first corresponding |:catch|, commands are skipped | |
| 7126 until the first ":catch" matching {expr1} is reached. | |
| 7127 If there is no such ":catch" or if the ":throw" is | |
| 7128 used after a ":catch" but before the |:finally|, the | |
| 7129 commands following the ":finally" (if present) up to | |
| 7130 the matching |:endtry| are executed. If the ":throw" | |
| 7131 is after the ":finally", commands up to the ":endtry" | |
| 7132 are skipped. At the ":endtry", this process applies | |
| 7133 again for the next dynamically surrounding ":try" | |
| 7134 (which may be found in a calling function or sourcing | |
| 7135 script), until a matching ":catch" has been found. | |
| 7136 If the exception is not caught, the command processing | |
| 7137 is terminated. | |
| 7138 Example: > | |
| 7139 :try | throw "oops" | catch /^oo/ | echo "caught" | endtry | |
| 2725 | 7140 < Note that "catch" may need to be on a separate line |
| 7141 for when an error causes the parsing to skip the whole | |
| 7142 line and not see the "|" that separates the commands. | |
| 7 | 7143 |
| 7144 *:ec* *:echo* | |
| 7145 :ec[ho] {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, with a space in between. The | |
| 7146 first {expr1} starts on a new line. | |
| 7147 Also see |:comment|. | |
| 7148 Use "\n" to start a new line. Use "\r" to move the | |
| 7149 cursor to the first column. | |
| 7150 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command. | |
| 7151 Cannot be followed by a comment. | |
| 7152 Example: > | |
| 7153 :echo "the value of 'shell' is" &shell | |
| 1156 | 7154 < *:echo-redraw* |
| 7155 A later redraw may make the message disappear again. | |
| 7156 And since Vim mostly postpones redrawing until it's | |
| 7157 finished with a sequence of commands this happens | |
| 7158 quite often. To avoid that a command from before the | |
| 7159 ":echo" causes a redraw afterwards (redraws are often | |
| 7160 postponed until you type something), force a redraw | |
| 7161 with the |:redraw| command. Example: > | |
| 7 | 7162 :new | redraw | echo "there is a new window" |
| 7163 < | |
| 7164 *:echon* | |
| 7165 :echon {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, without anything added. Also see | |
| 7166 |:comment|. | |
| 7167 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command. | |
| 7168 Cannot be followed by a comment. | |
| 7169 Example: > | |
| 7170 :echon "the value of 'shell' is " &shell | |
| 7171 < | |
| 7172 Note the difference between using ":echo", which is a | |
| 7173 Vim command, and ":!echo", which is an external shell | |
| 7174 command: > | |
| 7175 :!echo % --> filename | |
| 7176 < The arguments of ":!" are expanded, see |:_%|. > | |
| 7177 :!echo "%" --> filename or "filename" | |
| 7178 < Like the previous example. Whether you see the double | |
| 7179 quotes or not depends on your 'shell'. > | |
| 7180 :echo % --> nothing | |
| 7181 < The '%' is an illegal character in an expression. > | |
| 7182 :echo "%" --> % | |
| 7183 < This just echoes the '%' character. > | |
| 7184 :echo expand("%") --> filename | |
| 7185 < This calls the expand() function to expand the '%'. | |
| 7186 | |
| 7187 *:echoh* *:echohl* | |
| 7188 :echoh[l] {name} Use the highlight group {name} for the following | |
| 7189 |:echo|, |:echon| and |:echomsg| commands. Also used | |
| 7190 for the |input()| prompt. Example: > | |
| 7191 :echohl WarningMsg | echo "Don't panic!" | echohl None | |
| 7192 < Don't forget to set the group back to "None", | |
| 7193 otherwise all following echo's will be highlighted. | |
| 7194 | |
| 7195 *:echom* *:echomsg* | |
| 7196 :echom[sg] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as a true message, saving the | |
| 7197 message in the |message-history|. | |
| 7198 Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the | |
| 7199 |:echo| command. But unprintable characters are | |
| 7200 displayed, not interpreted. | |
| 1156 | 7201 The parsing works slightly different from |:echo|, |
| 7202 more like |:execute|. All the expressions are first | |
| 7203 evaluated and concatenated before echoing anything. | |
| 7204 The expressions must evaluate to a Number or String, a | |
| 7205 Dictionary or List causes an error. | |
| 7 | 7206 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command. |
| 7207 Example: > | |
| 7208 :echomsg "It's a Zizzer Zazzer Zuzz, as you can plainly see." | |
| 1156 | 7209 < See |:echo-redraw| to avoid the message disappearing |
| 7210 when the screen is redrawn. | |
| 7 | 7211 *:echoe* *:echoerr* |
| 7212 :echoe[rr] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as an error message, saving the | |
| 7213 message in the |message-history|. When used in a | |
| 7214 script or function the line number will be added. | |
| 7215 Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the | |
| 1621 | 7216 :echo command. When used inside a try conditional, |
| 7 | 7217 the message is raised as an error exception instead |
| 7218 (see |try-echoerr|). | |
| 7219 Example: > | |
| 7220 :echoerr "This script just failed!" | |
| 7221 < If you just want a highlighted message use |:echohl|. | |
| 7222 And to get a beep: > | |
| 7223 :exe "normal \<Esc>" | |
| 7224 < | |
| 7225 *:exe* *:execute* | |
| 7226 :exe[cute] {expr1} .. Executes the string that results from the evaluation | |
| 2152 | 7227 of {expr1} as an Ex command. |
| 7228 Multiple arguments are concatenated, with a space in | |
| 7229 between. To avoid the extra space use the "." | |
| 7230 operator to concatenate strings into one argument. | |
| 7231 {expr1} is used as the processed command, command line | |
| 7232 editing keys are not recognized. | |
| 7 | 7233 Cannot be followed by a comment. |
| 7234 Examples: > | |
| 2152 | 7235 :execute "buffer" nextbuf |
| 7236 :execute "normal" count . "w" | |
| 7 | 7237 < |
| 7238 ":execute" can be used to append a command to commands | |
| 7239 that don't accept a '|'. Example: > | |
| 7240 :execute '!ls' | echo "theend" | |
| 7241 | |
| 7242 < ":execute" is also a nice way to avoid having to type | |
| 7243 control characters in a Vim script for a ":normal" | |
| 7244 command: > | |
| 7245 :execute "normal ixxx\<Esc>" | |
| 7246 < This has an <Esc> character, see |expr-string|. | |
| 7247 | |
| 1621 | 7248 Be careful to correctly escape special characters in |
| 7249 file names. The |fnameescape()| function can be used | |
| 1661 | 7250 for Vim commands, |shellescape()| for |:!| commands. |
| 7251 Examples: > | |
| 1621 | 7252 :execute "e " . fnameescape(filename) |
| 1661 | 7253 :execute "!ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'), 1) |
| 1621 | 7254 < |
| 7 | 7255 Note: The executed string may be any command-line, but |
| 99 | 7256 you cannot start or end a "while", "for" or "if" |
| 7257 command. Thus this is illegal: > | |
| 7 | 7258 :execute 'while i > 5' |
| 7259 :execute 'echo "test" | break' | |
| 7260 < | |
| 7261 It is allowed to have a "while" or "if" command | |
| 7262 completely in the executed string: > | |
| 7263 :execute 'while i < 5 | echo i | let i = i + 1 | endwhile' | |
| 7264 < | |
| 7265 | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7266 *:exe-comment* |
| 7 | 7267 ":execute", ":echo" and ":echon" cannot be followed by |
| 7268 a comment directly, because they see the '"' as the | |
| 7269 start of a string. But, you can use '|' followed by a | |
| 7270 comment. Example: > | |
| 7271 :echo "foo" | "this is a comment | |
| 7272 | |
| 7273 ============================================================================== | |
| 7274 8. Exception handling *exception-handling* | |
| 7275 | |
| 7276 The Vim script language comprises an exception handling feature. This section | |
| 7277 explains how it can be used in a Vim script. | |
| 7278 | |
| 7279 Exceptions may be raised by Vim on an error or on interrupt, see | |
| 7280 |catch-errors| and |catch-interrupt|. You can also explicitly throw an | |
| 7281 exception by using the ":throw" command, see |throw-catch|. | |
| 7282 | |
| 7283 | |
| 7284 TRY CONDITIONALS *try-conditionals* | |
| 7285 | |
| 7286 Exceptions can be caught or can cause cleanup code to be executed. You can | |
| 7287 use a try conditional to specify catch clauses (that catch exceptions) and/or | |
| 7288 a finally clause (to be executed for cleanup). | |
| 7289 A try conditional begins with a |:try| command and ends at the matching | |
| 7290 |:endtry| command. In between, you can use a |:catch| command to start | |
| 7291 a catch clause, or a |:finally| command to start a finally clause. There may | |
| 7292 be none or multiple catch clauses, but there is at most one finally clause, | |
| 7293 which must not be followed by any catch clauses. The lines before the catch | |
| 7294 clauses and the finally clause is called a try block. > | |
| 7295 | |
| 7296 :try | |
| 1621 | 7297 : ... |
| 7298 : ... TRY BLOCK | |
| 7299 : ... | |
| 7 | 7300 :catch /{pattern}/ |
| 1621 | 7301 : ... |
| 7302 : ... CATCH CLAUSE | |
| 7303 : ... | |
| 7 | 7304 :catch /{pattern}/ |
| 1621 | 7305 : ... |
| 7306 : ... CATCH CLAUSE | |
| 7307 : ... | |
| 7 | 7308 :finally |
| 1621 | 7309 : ... |
| 7310 : ... FINALLY CLAUSE | |
| 7311 : ... | |
| 7 | 7312 :endtry |
| 7313 | |
| 7314 The try conditional allows to watch code for exceptions and to take the | |
| 7315 appropriate actions. Exceptions from the try block may be caught. Exceptions | |
| 7316 from the try block and also the catch clauses may cause cleanup actions. | |
| 7317 When no exception is thrown during execution of the try block, the control | |
| 7318 is transferred to the finally clause, if present. After its execution, the | |
| 7319 script continues with the line following the ":endtry". | |
| 7320 When an exception occurs during execution of the try block, the remaining | |
| 7321 lines in the try block are skipped. The exception is matched against the | |
| 7322 patterns specified as arguments to the ":catch" commands. The catch clause | |
| 7323 after the first matching ":catch" is taken, other catch clauses are not | |
| 7324 executed. The catch clause ends when the next ":catch", ":finally", or | |
| 7325 ":endtry" command is reached - whatever is first. Then, the finally clause | |
| 7326 (if present) is executed. When the ":endtry" is reached, the script execution | |
| 7327 continues in the following line as usual. | |
| 7328 When an exception that does not match any of the patterns specified by the | |
| 7329 ":catch" commands is thrown in the try block, the exception is not caught by | |
| 7330 that try conditional and none of the catch clauses is executed. Only the | |
| 7331 finally clause, if present, is taken. The exception pends during execution of | |
| 7332 the finally clause. It is resumed at the ":endtry", so that commands after | |
| 7333 the ":endtry" are not executed and the exception might be caught elsewhere, | |
| 7334 see |try-nesting|. | |
| 7335 When during execution of a catch clause another exception is thrown, the | |
| 1621 | 7336 remaining lines in that catch clause are not executed. The new exception is |
| 7 | 7337 not matched against the patterns in any of the ":catch" commands of the same |
| 7338 try conditional and none of its catch clauses is taken. If there is, however, | |
| 7339 a finally clause, it is executed, and the exception pends during its | |
| 7340 execution. The commands following the ":endtry" are not executed. The new | |
| 7341 exception might, however, be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|. | |
| 7342 When during execution of the finally clause (if present) an exception is | |
| 1621 | 7343 thrown, the remaining lines in the finally clause are skipped. If the finally |
| 7 | 7344 clause has been taken because of an exception from the try block or one of the |
| 7345 catch clauses, the original (pending) exception is discarded. The commands | |
| 7346 following the ":endtry" are not executed, and the exception from the finally | |
| 7347 clause is propagated and can be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|. | |
| 7348 | |
| 7349 The finally clause is also executed, when a ":break" or ":continue" for | |
| 7350 a ":while" loop enclosing the complete try conditional is executed from the | |
| 7351 try block or a catch clause. Or when a ":return" or ":finish" is executed | |
| 7352 from the try block or a catch clause of a try conditional in a function or | |
| 7353 sourced script, respectively. The ":break", ":continue", ":return", or | |
| 7354 ":finish" pends during execution of the finally clause and is resumed when the | |
| 7355 ":endtry" is reached. It is, however, discarded when an exception is thrown | |
| 7356 from the finally clause. | |
| 7357 When a ":break" or ":continue" for a ":while" loop enclosing the complete | |
| 7358 try conditional or when a ":return" or ":finish" is encountered in the finally | |
| 7359 clause, the rest of the finally clause is skipped, and the ":break", | |
| 7360 ":continue", ":return" or ":finish" is executed as usual. If the finally | |
| 7361 clause has been taken because of an exception or an earlier ":break", | |
| 7362 ":continue", ":return", or ":finish" from the try block or a catch clause, | |
| 7363 this pending exception or command is discarded. | |
| 7364 | |
| 7365 For examples see |throw-catch| and |try-finally|. | |
| 7366 | |
| 7367 | |
| 7368 NESTING OF TRY CONDITIONALS *try-nesting* | |
| 7369 | |
| 7370 Try conditionals can be nested arbitrarily. That is, a complete try | |
| 7371 conditional can be put into the try block, a catch clause, or the finally | |
| 7372 clause of another try conditional. If the inner try conditional does not | |
| 7373 catch an exception thrown in its try block or throws a new exception from one | |
| 7374 of its catch clauses or its finally clause, the outer try conditional is | |
| 7375 checked according to the rules above. If the inner try conditional is in the | |
| 7376 try block of the outer try conditional, its catch clauses are checked, but | |
| 1621 | 7377 otherwise only the finally clause is executed. It does not matter for |
| 7 | 7378 nesting, whether the inner try conditional is directly contained in the outer |
| 7379 one, or whether the outer one sources a script or calls a function containing | |
| 7380 the inner try conditional. | |
| 7381 | |
| 7382 When none of the active try conditionals catches an exception, just their | |
| 7383 finally clauses are executed. Thereafter, the script processing terminates. | |
| 7384 An error message is displayed in case of an uncaught exception explicitly | |
| 7385 thrown by a ":throw" command. For uncaught error and interrupt exceptions | |
| 7386 implicitly raised by Vim, the error message(s) or interrupt message are shown | |
| 7387 as usual. | |
| 7388 | |
| 7389 For examples see |throw-catch|. | |
| 7390 | |
| 7391 | |
| 7392 EXAMINING EXCEPTION HANDLING CODE *except-examine* | |
| 7393 | |
| 7394 Exception handling code can get tricky. If you are in doubt what happens, set | |
| 7395 'verbose' to 13 or use the ":13verbose" command modifier when sourcing your | |
| 7396 script file. Then you see when an exception is thrown, discarded, caught, or | |
| 7397 finished. When using a verbosity level of at least 14, things pending in | |
| 7398 a finally clause are also shown. This information is also given in debug mode | |
| 7399 (see |debug-scripts|). | |
| 7400 | |
| 7401 | |
| 7402 THROWING AND CATCHING EXCEPTIONS *throw-catch* | |
| 7403 | |
| 7404 You can throw any number or string as an exception. Use the |:throw| command | |
| 7405 and pass the value to be thrown as argument: > | |
| 7406 :throw 4711 | |
| 7407 :throw "string" | |
| 7408 < *throw-expression* | |
| 7409 You can also specify an expression argument. The expression is then evaluated | |
| 7410 first, and the result is thrown: > | |
| 7411 :throw 4705 + strlen("string") | |
| 7412 :throw strpart("strings", 0, 6) | |
| 7413 | |
| 7414 An exception might be thrown during evaluation of the argument of the ":throw" | |
| 7415 command. Unless it is caught there, the expression evaluation is abandoned. | |
| 7416 The ":throw" command then does not throw a new exception. | |
| 7417 Example: > | |
| 7418 | |
| 7419 :function! Foo(arg) | |
| 7420 : try | |
| 7421 : throw a:arg | |
| 7422 : catch /foo/ | |
| 7423 : endtry | |
| 7424 : return 1 | |
| 7425 :endfunction | |
| 7426 : | |
| 7427 :function! Bar() | |
| 7428 : echo "in Bar" | |
| 7429 : return 4710 | |
| 7430 :endfunction | |
| 7431 : | |
| 7432 :throw Foo("arrgh") + Bar() | |
| 7433 | |
| 7434 This throws "arrgh", and "in Bar" is not displayed since Bar() is not | |
| 7435 executed. > | |
| 7436 :throw Foo("foo") + Bar() | |
| 7437 however displays "in Bar" and throws 4711. | |
| 7438 | |
| 7439 Any other command that takes an expression as argument might also be | |
| 1621 | 7440 abandoned by an (uncaught) exception during the expression evaluation. The |
| 7 | 7441 exception is then propagated to the caller of the command. |
| 7442 Example: > | |
| 7443 | |
| 7444 :if Foo("arrgh") | |
| 7445 : echo "then" | |
| 7446 :else | |
| 7447 : echo "else" | |
| 7448 :endif | |
| 7449 | |
| 7450 Here neither of "then" or "else" is displayed. | |
| 7451 | |
| 7452 *catch-order* | |
| 7453 Exceptions can be caught by a try conditional with one or more |:catch| | |
| 7454 commands, see |try-conditionals|. The values to be caught by each ":catch" | |
| 7455 command can be specified as a pattern argument. The subsequent catch clause | |
| 7456 gets executed when a matching exception is caught. | |
| 7457 Example: > | |
| 7458 | |
| 7459 :function! Foo(value) | |
| 7460 : try | |
| 7461 : throw a:value | |
| 7462 : catch /^\d\+$/ | |
| 7463 : echo "Number thrown" | |
| 7464 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7465 : echo "String thrown" | |
| 7466 : endtry | |
| 7467 :endfunction | |
| 7468 : | |
| 7469 :call Foo(0x1267) | |
| 7470 :call Foo('string') | |
| 7471 | |
| 7472 The first call to Foo() displays "Number thrown", the second "String thrown". | |
| 7473 An exception is matched against the ":catch" commands in the order they are | |
| 7474 specified. Only the first match counts. So you should place the more | |
| 7475 specific ":catch" first. The following order does not make sense: > | |
| 7476 | |
| 7477 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7478 : echo "String thrown" | |
| 7479 : catch /^\d\+$/ | |
| 7480 : echo "Number thrown" | |
| 7481 | |
| 7482 The first ":catch" here matches always, so that the second catch clause is | |
| 7483 never taken. | |
| 7484 | |
| 7485 *throw-variables* | |
| 7486 If you catch an exception by a general pattern, you may access the exact value | |
| 7487 in the variable |v:exception|: > | |
| 7488 | |
| 7489 : catch /^\d\+$/ | |
| 7490 : echo "Number thrown. Value is" v:exception | |
| 7491 | |
| 7492 You may also be interested where an exception was thrown. This is stored in | |
| 7493 |v:throwpoint|. Note that "v:exception" and "v:throwpoint" are valid for the | |
| 7494 exception most recently caught as long it is not finished. | |
| 7495 Example: > | |
| 7496 | |
| 7497 :function! Caught() | |
| 7498 : if v:exception != "" | |
| 7499 : echo 'Caught "' . v:exception . '" in ' . v:throwpoint | |
| 7500 : else | |
| 7501 : echo 'Nothing caught' | |
| 7502 : endif | |
| 7503 :endfunction | |
| 7504 : | |
| 7505 :function! Foo() | |
| 7506 : try | |
| 7507 : try | |
| 7508 : try | |
| 7509 : throw 4711 | |
| 7510 : finally | |
| 7511 : call Caught() | |
| 7512 : endtry | |
| 7513 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7514 : call Caught() | |
| 7515 : throw "oops" | |
| 7516 : endtry | |
| 7517 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7518 : call Caught() | |
| 7519 : finally | |
| 7520 : call Caught() | |
| 7521 : endtry | |
| 7522 :endfunction | |
| 7523 : | |
| 7524 :call Foo() | |
| 7525 | |
| 7526 This displays > | |
| 7527 | |
| 7528 Nothing caught | |
| 7529 Caught "4711" in function Foo, line 4 | |
| 7530 Caught "oops" in function Foo, line 10 | |
| 7531 Nothing caught | |
| 7532 | |
| 7533 A practical example: The following command ":LineNumber" displays the line | |
| 7534 number in the script or function where it has been used: > | |
| 7535 | |
| 7536 :function! LineNumber() | |
| 7537 : return substitute(v:throwpoint, '.*\D\(\d\+\).*', '\1', "") | |
| 7538 :endfunction | |
| 7539 :command! LineNumber try | throw "" | catch | echo LineNumber() | endtry | |
| 7540 < | |
| 7541 *try-nested* | |
| 7542 An exception that is not caught by a try conditional can be caught by | |
| 7543 a surrounding try conditional: > | |
| 7544 | |
| 7545 :try | |
| 7546 : try | |
| 7547 : throw "foo" | |
| 7548 : catch /foobar/ | |
| 7549 : echo "foobar" | |
| 7550 : finally | |
| 7551 : echo "inner finally" | |
| 7552 : endtry | |
| 7553 :catch /foo/ | |
| 7554 : echo "foo" | |
| 7555 :endtry | |
| 7556 | |
| 7557 The inner try conditional does not catch the exception, just its finally | |
| 7558 clause is executed. The exception is then caught by the outer try | |
| 7559 conditional. The example displays "inner finally" and then "foo". | |
| 7560 | |
| 7561 *throw-from-catch* | |
| 7562 You can catch an exception and throw a new one to be caught elsewhere from the | |
| 7563 catch clause: > | |
| 7564 | |
| 7565 :function! Foo() | |
| 7566 : throw "foo" | |
| 7567 :endfunction | |
| 7568 : | |
| 7569 :function! Bar() | |
| 7570 : try | |
| 7571 : call Foo() | |
| 7572 : catch /foo/ | |
| 7573 : echo "Caught foo, throw bar" | |
| 7574 : throw "bar" | |
| 7575 : endtry | |
| 7576 :endfunction | |
| 7577 : | |
| 7578 :try | |
| 7579 : call Bar() | |
| 7580 :catch /.*/ | |
| 7581 : echo "Caught" v:exception | |
| 7582 :endtry | |
| 7583 | |
| 7584 This displays "Caught foo, throw bar" and then "Caught bar". | |
| 7585 | |
| 7586 *rethrow* | |
| 7587 There is no real rethrow in the Vim script language, but you may throw | |
| 7588 "v:exception" instead: > | |
| 7589 | |
| 7590 :function! Bar() | |
| 7591 : try | |
| 7592 : call Foo() | |
| 7593 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7594 : echo "Rethrow" v:exception | |
| 7595 : throw v:exception | |
| 7596 : endtry | |
| 7597 :endfunction | |
| 7598 < *try-echoerr* | |
| 7599 Note that this method cannot be used to "rethrow" Vim error or interrupt | |
| 7600 exceptions, because it is not possible to fake Vim internal exceptions. | |
| 7601 Trying so causes an error exception. You should throw your own exception | |
| 7602 denoting the situation. If you want to cause a Vim error exception containing | |
| 7603 the original error exception value, you can use the |:echoerr| command: > | |
| 7604 | |
| 7605 :try | |
| 7606 : try | |
| 7607 : asdf | |
| 7608 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7609 : echoerr v:exception | |
| 7610 : endtry | |
| 7611 :catch /.*/ | |
| 7612 : echo v:exception | |
| 7613 :endtry | |
| 7614 | |
| 7615 This code displays | |
| 7616 | |
| 1621 | 7617 Vim(echoerr):Vim:E492: Not an editor command: asdf ~ |
| 7 | 7618 |
| 7619 | |
| 7620 CLEANUP CODE *try-finally* | |
| 7621 | |
| 7622 Scripts often change global settings and restore them at their end. If the | |
| 7623 user however interrupts the script by pressing CTRL-C, the settings remain in | |
| 1621 | 7624 an inconsistent state. The same may happen to you in the development phase of |
| 7 | 7625 a script when an error occurs or you explicitly throw an exception without |
| 7626 catching it. You can solve these problems by using a try conditional with | |
| 7627 a finally clause for restoring the settings. Its execution is guaranteed on | |
| 7628 normal control flow, on error, on an explicit ":throw", and on interrupt. | |
| 7629 (Note that errors and interrupts from inside the try conditional are converted | |
| 1621 | 7630 to exceptions. When not caught, they terminate the script after the finally |
| 7 | 7631 clause has been executed.) |
| 7632 Example: > | |
| 7633 | |
| 7634 :try | |
| 7635 : let s:saved_ts = &ts | |
| 7636 : set ts=17 | |
| 7637 : | |
| 7638 : " Do the hard work here. | |
| 7639 : | |
| 7640 :finally | |
| 7641 : let &ts = s:saved_ts | |
| 7642 : unlet s:saved_ts | |
| 7643 :endtry | |
| 7644 | |
| 7645 This method should be used locally whenever a function or part of a script | |
| 7646 changes global settings which need to be restored on failure or normal exit of | |
| 7647 that function or script part. | |
| 7648 | |
| 7649 *break-finally* | |
| 7650 Cleanup code works also when the try block or a catch clause is left by | |
| 7651 a ":continue", ":break", ":return", or ":finish". | |
| 7652 Example: > | |
| 7653 | |
| 7654 :let first = 1 | |
| 7655 :while 1 | |
| 7656 : try | |
| 7657 : if first | |
| 7658 : echo "first" | |
| 7659 : let first = 0 | |
| 7660 : continue | |
| 7661 : else | |
| 7662 : throw "second" | |
| 7663 : endif | |
| 7664 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7665 : echo v:exception | |
| 7666 : break | |
| 7667 : finally | |
| 7668 : echo "cleanup" | |
| 7669 : endtry | |
| 7670 : echo "still in while" | |
| 7671 :endwhile | |
| 7672 :echo "end" | |
| 7673 | |
| 7674 This displays "first", "cleanup", "second", "cleanup", and "end". > | |
| 7675 | |
| 7676 :function! Foo() | |
| 7677 : try | |
| 7678 : return 4711 | |
| 7679 : finally | |
| 7680 : echo "cleanup\n" | |
| 7681 : endtry | |
| 7682 : echo "Foo still active" | |
| 7683 :endfunction | |
| 7684 : | |
| 7685 :echo Foo() "returned by Foo" | |
| 7686 | |
| 7687 This displays "cleanup" and "4711 returned by Foo". You don't need to add an | |
| 1621 | 7688 extra ":return" in the finally clause. (Above all, this would override the |
| 7 | 7689 return value.) |
| 7690 | |
| 7691 *except-from-finally* | |
| 7692 Using either of ":continue", ":break", ":return", ":finish", or ":throw" in | |
| 7693 a finally clause is possible, but not recommended since it abandons the | |
| 7694 cleanup actions for the try conditional. But, of course, interrupt and error | |
| 7695 exceptions might get raised from a finally clause. | |
| 7696 Example where an error in the finally clause stops an interrupt from | |
| 7697 working correctly: > | |
| 7698 | |
| 7699 :try | |
| 7700 : try | |
| 7701 : echo "Press CTRL-C for interrupt" | |
| 7702 : while 1 | |
| 7703 : endwhile | |
| 7704 : finally | |
| 7705 : unlet novar | |
| 7706 : endtry | |
| 7707 :catch /novar/ | |
| 7708 :endtry | |
| 7709 :echo "Script still running" | |
| 7710 :sleep 1 | |
| 7711 | |
| 7712 If you need to put commands that could fail into a finally clause, you should | |
| 7713 think about catching or ignoring the errors in these commands, see | |
| 7714 |catch-errors| and |ignore-errors|. | |
| 7715 | |
| 7716 | |
| 7717 CATCHING ERRORS *catch-errors* | |
| 7718 | |
| 7719 If you want to catch specific errors, you just have to put the code to be | |
| 7720 watched in a try block and add a catch clause for the error message. The | |
| 7721 presence of the try conditional causes all errors to be converted to an | |
| 7722 exception. No message is displayed and |v:errmsg| is not set then. To find | |
| 7723 the right pattern for the ":catch" command, you have to know how the format of | |
| 7724 the error exception is. | |
| 7725 Error exceptions have the following format: > | |
| 7726 | |
| 7727 Vim({cmdname}):{errmsg} | |
| 7728 or > | |
| 7729 Vim:{errmsg} | |
| 7730 | |
| 7731 {cmdname} is the name of the command that failed; the second form is used when | |
| 1621 | 7732 the command name is not known. {errmsg} is the error message usually produced |
| 7 | 7733 when the error occurs outside try conditionals. It always begins with |
| 7734 a capital "E", followed by a two or three-digit error number, a colon, and | |
| 7735 a space. | |
| 7736 | |
| 7737 Examples: | |
| 7738 | |
| 7739 The command > | |
| 7740 :unlet novar | |
| 7741 normally produces the error message > | |
| 7742 E108: No such variable: "novar" | |
| 7743 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception > | |
| 7744 Vim(unlet):E108: No such variable: "novar" | |
| 7745 | |
| 7746 The command > | |
| 7747 :dwim | |
| 7748 normally produces the error message > | |
| 7749 E492: Not an editor command: dwim | |
| 7750 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception > | |
| 7751 Vim:E492: Not an editor command: dwim | |
| 7752 | |
| 7753 You can catch all ":unlet" errors by a > | |
| 7754 :catch /^Vim(unlet):/ | |
| 7755 or all errors for misspelled command names by a > | |
| 7756 :catch /^Vim:E492:/ | |
| 7757 | |
| 7758 Some error messages may be produced by different commands: > | |
| 7759 :function nofunc | |
| 7760 and > | |
| 7761 :delfunction nofunc | |
| 7762 both produce the error message > | |
| 7763 E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc | |
| 7764 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception > | |
| 7765 Vim(function):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc | |
| 7766 or > | |
| 7767 Vim(delfunction):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc | |
| 7768 respectively. You can catch the error by its number independently on the | |
| 7769 command that caused it if you use the following pattern: > | |
| 7770 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E128:/ | |
| 7771 | |
| 7772 Some commands like > | |
| 7773 :let x = novar | |
| 7774 produce multiple error messages, here: > | |
| 7775 E121: Undefined variable: novar | |
| 7776 E15: Invalid expression: novar | |
| 7777 Only the first is used for the exception value, since it is the most specific | |
| 7778 one (see |except-several-errors|). So you can catch it by > | |
| 7779 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E121:/ | |
| 7780 | |
| 7781 You can catch all errors related to the name "nofunc" by > | |
| 7782 :catch /\<nofunc\>/ | |
| 7783 | |
| 7784 You can catch all Vim errors in the ":write" and ":read" commands by > | |
| 7785 :catch /^Vim(\(write\|read\)):E\d\+:/ | |
| 7786 | |
| 7787 You can catch all Vim errors by the pattern > | |
| 7788 :catch /^Vim\((\a\+)\)\=:E\d\+:/ | |
| 7789 < | |
| 7790 *catch-text* | |
| 7791 NOTE: You should never catch the error message text itself: > | |
| 7792 :catch /No such variable/ | |
| 7793 only works in the english locale, but not when the user has selected | |
| 7794 a different language by the |:language| command. It is however helpful to | |
| 7795 cite the message text in a comment: > | |
| 7796 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E108:/ " No such variable | |
| 7797 | |
| 7798 | |
| 7799 IGNORING ERRORS *ignore-errors* | |
| 7800 | |
| 7801 You can ignore errors in a specific Vim command by catching them locally: > | |
| 7802 | |
| 7803 :try | |
| 7804 : write | |
| 7805 :catch | |
| 7806 :endtry | |
| 7807 | |
| 7808 But you are strongly recommended NOT to use this simple form, since it could | |
| 7809 catch more than you want. With the ":write" command, some autocommands could | |
| 7810 be executed and cause errors not related to writing, for instance: > | |
| 7811 | |
| 7812 :au BufWritePre * unlet novar | |
| 7813 | |
| 7814 There could even be such errors you are not responsible for as a script | |
| 7815 writer: a user of your script might have defined such autocommands. You would | |
| 7816 then hide the error from the user. | |
| 7817 It is much better to use > | |
| 7818 | |
| 7819 :try | |
| 7820 : write | |
| 7821 :catch /^Vim(write):/ | |
| 7822 :endtry | |
| 7823 | |
| 7824 which only catches real write errors. So catch only what you'd like to ignore | |
| 7825 intentionally. | |
| 7826 | |
| 7827 For a single command that does not cause execution of autocommands, you could | |
| 7828 even suppress the conversion of errors to exceptions by the ":silent!" | |
| 7829 command: > | |
| 7830 :silent! nunmap k | |
| 7831 This works also when a try conditional is active. | |
| 7832 | |
| 7833 | |
| 7834 CATCHING INTERRUPTS *catch-interrupt* | |
| 7835 | |
| 7836 When there are active try conditionals, an interrupt (CTRL-C) is converted to | |
| 1621 | 7837 the exception "Vim:Interrupt". You can catch it like every exception. The |
| 7 | 7838 script is not terminated, then. |
| 7839 Example: > | |
| 7840 | |
| 7841 :function! TASK1() | |
| 7842 : sleep 10 | |
| 7843 :endfunction | |
| 7844 | |
| 7845 :function! TASK2() | |
| 7846 : sleep 20 | |
| 7847 :endfunction | |
| 7848 | |
| 7849 :while 1 | |
| 7850 : let command = input("Type a command: ") | |
| 7851 : try | |
| 7852 : if command == "" | |
| 7853 : continue | |
| 7854 : elseif command == "END" | |
| 7855 : break | |
| 7856 : elseif command == "TASK1" | |
| 7857 : call TASK1() | |
| 7858 : elseif command == "TASK2" | |
| 7859 : call TASK2() | |
| 7860 : else | |
| 7861 : echo "\nIllegal command:" command | |
| 7862 : continue | |
| 7863 : endif | |
| 7864 : catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | |
| 7865 : echo "\nCommand interrupted" | |
| 7866 : " Caught the interrupt. Continue with next prompt. | |
| 7867 : endtry | |
| 7868 :endwhile | |
| 7869 | |
| 7870 You can interrupt a task here by pressing CTRL-C; the script then asks for | |
| 1621 | 7871 a new command. If you press CTRL-C at the prompt, the script is terminated. |
| 7 | 7872 |
| 7873 For testing what happens when CTRL-C would be pressed on a specific line in | |
| 7874 your script, use the debug mode and execute the |>quit| or |>interrupt| | |
| 7875 command on that line. See |debug-scripts|. | |
| 7876 | |
| 7877 | |
| 7878 CATCHING ALL *catch-all* | |
| 7879 | |
| 7880 The commands > | |
| 7881 | |
| 7882 :catch /.*/ | |
| 7883 :catch // | |
| 7884 :catch | |
| 7885 | |
| 7886 catch everything, error exceptions, interrupt exceptions and exceptions | |
| 7887 explicitly thrown by the |:throw| command. This is useful at the top level of | |
| 7888 a script in order to catch unexpected things. | |
| 7889 Example: > | |
| 7890 | |
| 7891 :try | |
| 7892 : | |
| 7893 : " do the hard work here | |
| 7894 : | |
| 7895 :catch /MyException/ | |
| 7896 : | |
| 7897 : " handle known problem | |
| 7898 : | |
| 7899 :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | |
| 7900 : echo "Script interrupted" | |
| 7901 :catch /.*/ | |
| 7902 : echo "Internal error (" . v:exception . ")" | |
| 7903 : echo " - occurred at " . v:throwpoint | |
| 7904 :endtry | |
| 7905 :" end of script | |
| 7906 | |
| 7907 Note: Catching all might catch more things than you want. Thus, you are | |
| 7908 strongly encouraged to catch only for problems that you can really handle by | |
| 7909 specifying a pattern argument to the ":catch". | |
| 7910 Example: Catching all could make it nearly impossible to interrupt a script | |
| 7911 by pressing CTRL-C: > | |
| 7912 | |
| 7913 :while 1 | |
| 7914 : try | |
| 7915 : sleep 1 | |
| 7916 : catch | |
| 7917 : endtry | |
| 7918 :endwhile | |
| 7919 | |
| 7920 | |
| 7921 EXCEPTIONS AND AUTOCOMMANDS *except-autocmd* | |
| 7922 | |
| 7923 Exceptions may be used during execution of autocommands. Example: > | |
| 7924 | |
| 7925 :autocmd User x try | |
| 7926 :autocmd User x throw "Oops!" | |
| 7927 :autocmd User x catch | |
| 7928 :autocmd User x echo v:exception | |
| 7929 :autocmd User x endtry | |
| 7930 :autocmd User x throw "Arrgh!" | |
| 7931 :autocmd User x echo "Should not be displayed" | |
| 7932 : | |
| 7933 :try | |
| 7934 : doautocmd User x | |
| 7935 :catch | |
| 7936 : echo v:exception | |
| 7937 :endtry | |
| 7938 | |
| 7939 This displays "Oops!" and "Arrgh!". | |
| 7940 | |
| 7941 *except-autocmd-Pre* | |
| 7942 For some commands, autocommands get executed before the main action of the | |
| 7943 command takes place. If an exception is thrown and not caught in the sequence | |
| 7944 of autocommands, the sequence and the command that caused its execution are | |
| 7945 abandoned and the exception is propagated to the caller of the command. | |
| 7946 Example: > | |
| 7947 | |
| 7948 :autocmd BufWritePre * throw "FAIL" | |
| 7949 :autocmd BufWritePre * echo "Should not be displayed" | |
| 7950 : | |
| 7951 :try | |
| 7952 : write | |
| 7953 :catch | |
| 7954 : echo "Caught:" v:exception "from" v:throwpoint | |
| 7955 :endtry | |
| 7956 | |
| 7957 Here, the ":write" command does not write the file currently being edited (as | |
| 7958 you can see by checking 'modified'), since the exception from the BufWritePre | |
| 7959 autocommand abandons the ":write". The exception is then caught and the | |
| 7960 script displays: > | |
| 7961 | |
| 7962 Caught: FAIL from BufWrite Auto commands for "*" | |
| 7963 < | |
| 7964 *except-autocmd-Post* | |
| 7965 For some commands, autocommands get executed after the main action of the | |
| 7966 command has taken place. If this main action fails and the command is inside | |
| 7967 an active try conditional, the autocommands are skipped and an error exception | |
| 7968 is thrown that can be caught by the caller of the command. | |
| 7969 Example: > | |
| 7970 | |
| 7971 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "File successfully written!" | |
| 7972 : | |
| 7973 :try | |
| 7974 : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 7975 :catch | |
| 7976 : echo v:exception | |
| 7977 :endtry | |
| 7978 | |
| 7979 This just displays: > | |
| 7980 | |
| 7981 Vim(write):E212: Can't open file for writing (/i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e) | |
| 7982 | |
| 7983 If you really need to execute the autocommands even when the main action | |
| 7984 fails, trigger the event from the catch clause. | |
| 7985 Example: > | |
| 7986 | |
| 7987 :autocmd BufWritePre * set noreadonly | |
| 7988 :autocmd BufWritePost * set readonly | |
| 7989 : | |
| 7990 :try | |
| 7991 : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 7992 :catch | |
| 7993 : doautocmd BufWritePost /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 7994 :endtry | |
| 7995 < | |
| 7996 You can also use ":silent!": > | |
| 7997 | |
| 7998 :let x = "ok" | |
| 7999 :let v:errmsg = "" | |
| 8000 :autocmd BufWritePost * if v:errmsg != "" | |
| 8001 :autocmd BufWritePost * let x = "after fail" | |
| 8002 :autocmd BufWritePost * endif | |
| 8003 :try | |
| 8004 : silent! write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 8005 :catch | |
| 8006 :endtry | |
| 8007 :echo x | |
| 8008 | |
| 8009 This displays "after fail". | |
| 8010 | |
| 8011 If the main action of the command does not fail, exceptions from the | |
| 8012 autocommands will be catchable by the caller of the command: > | |
| 8013 | |
| 8014 :autocmd BufWritePost * throw ":-(" | |
| 8015 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "Should not be displayed" | |
| 8016 : | |
| 8017 :try | |
| 8018 : write | |
| 8019 :catch | |
| 8020 : echo v:exception | |
| 8021 :endtry | |
| 8022 < | |
| 8023 *except-autocmd-Cmd* | |
| 8024 For some commands, the normal action can be replaced by a sequence of | |
| 8025 autocommands. Exceptions from that sequence will be catchable by the caller | |
| 8026 of the command. | |
| 8027 Example: For the ":write" command, the caller cannot know whether the file | |
| 1621 | 8028 had actually been written when the exception occurred. You need to tell it in |
| 7 | 8029 some way. > |
| 8030 | |
| 8031 :if !exists("cnt") | |
| 8032 : let cnt = 0 | |
| 8033 : | |
| 8034 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if &modified | |
| 8035 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * let cnt = cnt + 1 | |
| 8036 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 2 | |
| 8037 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError" | |
| 8038 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif | |
| 8039 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * write | set nomodified | |
| 8040 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 0 | |
| 8041 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError" | |
| 8042 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif | |
| 8043 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * echo "File successfully written!" | |
| 8044 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif | |
| 8045 :endif | |
| 8046 : | |
| 8047 :try | |
| 8048 : write | |
| 8049 :catch /^BufWriteCmdError$/ | |
| 8050 : if &modified | |
| 8051 : echo "Error on writing (file contents not changed)" | |
| 8052 : else | |
| 8053 : echo "Error after writing" | |
| 8054 : endif | |
| 8055 :catch /^Vim(write):/ | |
| 8056 : echo "Error on writing" | |
| 8057 :endtry | |
| 8058 | |
| 8059 When this script is sourced several times after making changes, it displays | |
| 8060 first > | |
| 8061 File successfully written! | |
| 8062 then > | |
| 8063 Error on writing (file contents not changed) | |
| 8064 then > | |
| 8065 Error after writing | |
| 8066 etc. | |
| 8067 | |
| 8068 *except-autocmd-ill* | |
| 8069 You cannot spread a try conditional over autocommands for different events. | |
| 8070 The following code is ill-formed: > | |
| 8071 | |
| 8072 :autocmd BufWritePre * try | |
| 8073 : | |
| 8074 :autocmd BufWritePost * catch | |
| 8075 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo v:exception | |
| 8076 :autocmd BufWritePost * endtry | |
| 8077 : | |
| 8078 :write | |
| 8079 | |
| 8080 | |
| 8081 EXCEPTION HIERARCHIES AND PARAMETERIZED EXCEPTIONS *except-hier-param* | |
| 8082 | |
| 8083 Some programming languages allow to use hierarchies of exception classes or to | |
| 8084 pass additional information with the object of an exception class. You can do | |
| 8085 similar things in Vim. | |
| 8086 In order to throw an exception from a hierarchy, just throw the complete | |
| 8087 class name with the components separated by a colon, for instance throw the | |
| 8088 string "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" for an overflow in a mathematical library. | |
| 8089 When you want to pass additional information with your exception class, add | |
| 8090 it in parentheses, for instance throw the string "EXCEPT:IO:WRITEERR(myfile)" | |
| 8091 for an error when writing "myfile". | |
| 8092 With the appropriate patterns in the ":catch" command, you can catch for | |
| 8093 base classes or derived classes of your hierarchy. Additional information in | |
| 8094 parentheses can be cut out from |v:exception| with the ":substitute" command. | |
| 8095 Example: > | |
| 8096 | |
| 8097 :function! CheckRange(a, func) | |
| 8098 : if a:a < 0 | |
| 8099 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE(" . a:func . ")" | |
| 8100 : endif | |
| 8101 :endfunction | |
| 8102 : | |
| 8103 :function! Add(a, b) | |
| 8104 : call CheckRange(a:a, "Add") | |
| 8105 : call CheckRange(a:b, "Add") | |
| 8106 : let c = a:a + a:b | |
| 8107 : if c < 0 | |
| 8108 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" | |
| 8109 : endif | |
| 8110 : return c | |
| 8111 :endfunction | |
| 8112 : | |
| 8113 :function! Div(a, b) | |
| 8114 : call CheckRange(a:a, "Div") | |
| 8115 : call CheckRange(a:b, "Div") | |
| 8116 : if (a:b == 0) | |
| 8117 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:ZERODIV" | |
| 8118 : endif | |
| 8119 : return a:a / a:b | |
| 8120 :endfunction | |
| 8121 : | |
| 8122 :function! Write(file) | |
| 8123 : try | |
| 1621 | 8124 : execute "write" fnameescape(a:file) |
| 7 | 8125 : catch /^Vim(write):/ |
| 8126 : throw "EXCEPT:IO(" . getcwd() . ", " . a:file . "):WRITEERR" | |
| 8127 : endtry | |
| 8128 :endfunction | |
| 8129 : | |
| 8130 :try | |
| 8131 : | |
| 8132 : " something with arithmetics and I/O | |
| 8133 : | |
| 8134 :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE/ | |
| 8135 : let function = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(\a\+\)).*', '\1', "") | |
| 8136 : echo "Range error in" function | |
| 8137 : | |
| 8138 :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR/ " catches OVERFLOW and ZERODIV | |
| 8139 : echo "Math error" | |
| 8140 : | |
| 8141 :catch /^EXCEPT:IO/ | |
| 8142 : let dir = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(.\+\),\s*.\+).*', '\1', "") | |
| 8143 : let file = substitute(v:exception, '.*(.\+,\s*\(.\+\)).*', '\1', "") | |
| 8144 : if file !~ '^/' | |
| 8145 : let file = dir . "/" . file | |
| 8146 : endif | |
| 8147 : echo 'I/O error for "' . file . '"' | |
| 8148 : | |
| 8149 :catch /^EXCEPT/ | |
| 8150 : echo "Unspecified error" | |
| 8151 : | |
| 8152 :endtry | |
| 8153 | |
| 8154 The exceptions raised by Vim itself (on error or when pressing CTRL-C) use | |
| 8155 a flat hierarchy: they are all in the "Vim" class. You cannot throw yourself | |
| 8156 exceptions with the "Vim" prefix; they are reserved for Vim. | |
| 8157 Vim error exceptions are parameterized with the name of the command that | |
| 8158 failed, if known. See |catch-errors|. | |
| 8159 | |
| 8160 | |
| 8161 PECULIARITIES | |
| 8162 *except-compat* | |
| 8163 The exception handling concept requires that the command sequence causing the | |
| 8164 exception is aborted immediately and control is transferred to finally clauses | |
| 8165 and/or a catch clause. | |
| 8166 | |
| 8167 In the Vim script language there are cases where scripts and functions | |
| 8168 continue after an error: in functions without the "abort" flag or in a command | |
| 8169 after ":silent!", control flow goes to the following line, and outside | |
| 8170 functions, control flow goes to the line following the outermost ":endwhile" | |
| 8171 or ":endif". On the other hand, errors should be catchable as exceptions | |
| 8172 (thus, requiring the immediate abortion). | |
| 8173 | |
| 8174 This problem has been solved by converting errors to exceptions and using | |
| 8175 immediate abortion (if not suppressed by ":silent!") only when a try | |
| 1621 | 8176 conditional is active. This is no restriction since an (error) exception can |
| 8177 be caught only from an active try conditional. If you want an immediate | |
| 7 | 8178 termination without catching the error, just use a try conditional without |
| 8179 catch clause. (You can cause cleanup code being executed before termination | |
| 8180 by specifying a finally clause.) | |
| 8181 | |
| 8182 When no try conditional is active, the usual abortion and continuation | |
| 8183 behavior is used instead of immediate abortion. This ensures compatibility of | |
| 8184 scripts written for Vim 6.1 and earlier. | |
| 8185 | |
| 8186 However, when sourcing an existing script that does not use exception handling | |
| 8187 commands (or when calling one of its functions) from inside an active try | |
| 8188 conditional of a new script, you might change the control flow of the existing | |
| 8189 script on error. You get the immediate abortion on error and can catch the | |
| 8190 error in the new script. If however the sourced script suppresses error | |
| 8191 messages by using the ":silent!" command (checking for errors by testing | |
| 1621 | 8192 |v:errmsg| if appropriate), its execution path is not changed. The error is |
| 8193 not converted to an exception. (See |:silent|.) So the only remaining cause | |
| 7 | 8194 where this happens is for scripts that don't care about errors and produce |
| 8195 error messages. You probably won't want to use such code from your new | |
| 8196 scripts. | |
| 8197 | |
| 8198 *except-syntax-err* | |
| 8199 Syntax errors in the exception handling commands are never caught by any of | |
| 8200 the ":catch" commands of the try conditional they belong to. Its finally | |
| 8201 clauses, however, is executed. | |
| 8202 Example: > | |
| 8203 | |
| 8204 :try | |
| 8205 : try | |
| 8206 : throw 4711 | |
| 8207 : catch /\(/ | |
| 8208 : echo "in catch with syntax error" | |
| 8209 : catch | |
| 8210 : echo "inner catch-all" | |
| 8211 : finally | |
| 8212 : echo "inner finally" | |
| 8213 : endtry | |
| 8214 :catch | |
| 8215 : echo 'outer catch-all caught "' . v:exception . '"' | |
| 8216 : finally | |
| 8217 : echo "outer finally" | |
| 8218 :endtry | |
| 8219 | |
| 8220 This displays: > | |
| 8221 inner finally | |
| 8222 outer catch-all caught "Vim(catch):E54: Unmatched \(" | |
| 8223 outer finally | |
| 8224 The original exception is discarded and an error exception is raised, instead. | |
| 8225 | |
| 8226 *except-single-line* | |
| 8227 The ":try", ":catch", ":finally", and ":endtry" commands can be put on | |
| 8228 a single line, but then syntax errors may make it difficult to recognize the | |
| 8229 "catch" line, thus you better avoid this. | |
| 8230 Example: > | |
| 8231 :try | unlet! foo # | catch | endtry | |
| 8232 raises an error exception for the trailing characters after the ":unlet!" | |
| 8233 argument, but does not see the ":catch" and ":endtry" commands, so that the | |
| 8234 error exception is discarded and the "E488: Trailing characters" message gets | |
| 8235 displayed. | |
| 8236 | |
| 8237 *except-several-errors* | |
| 8238 When several errors appear in a single command, the first error message is | |
| 8239 usually the most specific one and therefor converted to the error exception. | |
| 8240 Example: > | |
| 8241 echo novar | |
| 8242 causes > | |
| 8243 E121: Undefined variable: novar | |
| 8244 E15: Invalid expression: novar | |
| 8245 The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: > | |
| 8246 Vim(echo):E121: Undefined variable: novar | |
| 8247 < *except-syntax-error* | |
| 8248 But when a syntax error is detected after a normal error in the same command, | |
| 8249 the syntax error is used for the exception being thrown. | |
| 8250 Example: > | |
| 8251 unlet novar # | |
| 8252 causes > | |
| 8253 E108: No such variable: "novar" | |
| 8254 E488: Trailing characters | |
| 8255 The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: > | |
| 8256 Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters | |
| 8257 This is done because the syntax error might change the execution path in a way | |
| 8258 not intended by the user. Example: > | |
| 8259 try | |
| 8260 try | unlet novar # | catch | echo v:exception | endtry | |
| 8261 catch /.*/ | |
| 8262 echo "outer catch:" v:exception | |
| 8263 endtry | |
| 8264 This displays "outer catch: Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters", and then | |
| 8265 a "E600: Missing :endtry" error message is given, see |except-single-line|. | |
| 8266 | |
| 8267 ============================================================================== | |
| 8268 9. Examples *eval-examples* | |
| 8269 | |
| 1156 | 8270 Printing in Binary ~ |
| 7 | 8271 > |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
8272 :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the binary string representation of a number. |
| 1156 | 8273 :func Nr2Bin(nr) |
| 7 | 8274 : let n = a:nr |
| 8275 : let r = "" | |
| 8276 : while n | |
| 1156 | 8277 : let r = '01'[n % 2] . r |
| 8278 : let n = n / 2 | |
| 7 | 8279 : endwhile |
| 8280 : return r | |
| 8281 :endfunc | |
| 8282 | |
| 1156 | 8283 :" The function String2Bin() converts each character in a string to a |
| 8284 :" binary string, separated with dashes. | |
| 8285 :func String2Bin(str) | |
| 7 | 8286 : let out = '' |
| 1156 | 8287 : for ix in range(strlen(a:str)) |
| 8288 : let out = out . '-' . Nr2Bin(char2nr(a:str[ix])) | |
| 8289 : endfor | |
| 8290 : return out[1:] | |
| 7 | 8291 :endfunc |
| 8292 | |
| 8293 Example of its use: > | |
| 1156 | 8294 :echo Nr2Bin(32) |
| 8295 result: "100000" > | |
| 8296 :echo String2Bin("32") | |
| 8297 result: "110011-110010" | |
| 8298 | |
| 8299 | |
| 8300 Sorting lines ~ | |
| 8301 | |
| 8302 This example sorts lines with a specific compare function. > | |
| 8303 | |
| 8304 :func SortBuffer() | |
| 8305 : let lines = getline(1, '$') | |
| 8306 : call sort(lines, function("Strcmp")) | |
| 8307 : call setline(1, lines) | |
| 7 | 8308 :endfunction |
| 8309 | |
| 1156 | 8310 As a one-liner: > |
| 8311 :call setline(1, sort(getline(1, '$'), function("Strcmp"))) | |
| 8312 | |
| 8313 | |
| 8314 scanf() replacement ~ | |
| 7 | 8315 *sscanf* |
| 8316 There is no sscanf() function in Vim. If you need to extract parts from a | |
| 8317 line, you can use matchstr() and substitute() to do it. This example shows | |
| 8318 how to get the file name, line number and column number out of a line like | |
| 8319 "foobar.txt, 123, 45". > | |
| 8320 :" Set up the match bit | |
| 8321 :let mx='\(\f\+\),\s*\(\d\+\),\s*\(\d\+\)' | |
| 8322 :"get the part matching the whole expression | |
| 8323 :let l = matchstr(line, mx) | |
| 8324 :"get each item out of the match | |
| 8325 :let file = substitute(l, mx, '\1', '') | |
| 8326 :let lnum = substitute(l, mx, '\2', '') | |
| 8327 :let col = substitute(l, mx, '\3', '') | |
| 8328 | |
| 8329 The input is in the variable "line", the results in the variables "file", | |
| 8330 "lnum" and "col". (idea from Michael Geddes) | |
| 8331 | |
| 1156 | 8332 |
| 8333 getting the scriptnames in a Dictionary ~ | |
| 8334 *scriptnames-dictionary* | |
| 8335 The |:scriptnames| command can be used to get a list of all script files that | |
| 8336 have been sourced. There is no equivalent function or variable for this | |
| 8337 (because it's rarely needed). In case you need to manipulate the list this | |
| 8338 code can be used: > | |
| 8339 " Get the output of ":scriptnames" in the scriptnames_output variable. | |
| 8340 let scriptnames_output = '' | |
| 8341 redir => scriptnames_output | |
| 8342 silent scriptnames | |
| 8343 redir END | |
| 8344 | |
| 1621 | 8345 " Split the output into lines and parse each line. Add an entry to the |
| 1156 | 8346 " "scripts" dictionary. |
| 8347 let scripts = {} | |
| 8348 for line in split(scriptnames_output, "\n") | |
| 8349 " Only do non-blank lines. | |
| 8350 if line =~ '\S' | |
| 8351 " Get the first number in the line. | |
| 1621 | 8352 let nr = matchstr(line, '\d\+') |
| 1156 | 8353 " Get the file name, remove the script number " 123: ". |
| 1621 | 8354 let name = substitute(line, '.\+:\s*', '', '') |
| 1156 | 8355 " Add an item to the Dictionary |
| 1621 | 8356 let scripts[nr] = name |
| 1156 | 8357 endif |
| 8358 endfor | |
| 8359 unlet scriptnames_output | |
| 8360 | |
| 7 | 8361 ============================================================================== |
| 8362 10. No +eval feature *no-eval-feature* | |
| 8363 | |
| 8364 When the |+eval| feature was disabled at compile time, none of the expression | |
| 8365 evaluation commands are available. To prevent this from causing Vim scripts | |
| 8366 to generate all kinds of errors, the ":if" and ":endif" commands are still | |
| 8367 recognized, though the argument of the ":if" and everything between the ":if" | |
| 8368 and the matching ":endif" is ignored. Nesting of ":if" blocks is allowed, but | |
| 8369 only if the commands are at the start of the line. The ":else" command is not | |
| 8370 recognized. | |
| 8371 | |
| 8372 Example of how to avoid executing commands when the |+eval| feature is | |
| 8373 missing: > | |
| 8374 | |
| 8375 :if 1 | |
| 8376 : echo "Expression evaluation is compiled in" | |
| 8377 :else | |
| 8378 : echo "You will _never_ see this message" | |
| 8379 :endif | |
| 8380 | |
| 8381 ============================================================================== | |
| 8382 11. The sandbox *eval-sandbox* *sandbox* *E48* | |
| 8383 | |
|
2350
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8384 The 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8385 'foldtext' options may be evaluated in a sandbox. This means that you are |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8386 protected from these expressions having nasty side effects. This gives some |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8387 safety for when these options are set from a modeline. It is also used when |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8388 the command from a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line. |
| 29 | 8389 The sandbox is also used for the |:sandbox| command. |
| 7 | 8390 |
| 8391 These items are not allowed in the sandbox: | |
| 8392 - changing the buffer text | |
| 8393 - defining or changing mapping, autocommands, functions, user commands | |
| 8394 - setting certain options (see |option-summary|) | |
| 1156 | 8395 - setting certain v: variables (see |v:var|) *E794* |
| 7 | 8396 - executing a shell command |
| 8397 - reading or writing a file | |
| 8398 - jumping to another buffer or editing a file | |
| 625 | 8399 - executing Python, Perl, etc. commands |
| 29 | 8400 This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks. |
| 8401 | |
| 8402 *:san* *:sandbox* | |
| 401 | 8403 :san[dbox] {cmd} Execute {cmd} in the sandbox. Useful to evaluate an |
| 29 | 8404 option that may have been set from a modeline, e.g. |
| 8405 'foldexpr'. | |
| 8406 | |
| 634 | 8407 *sandbox-option* |
| 8408 A few options contain an expression. When this expression is evaluated it may | |
| 790 | 8409 have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risk. But the sandbox is |
| 634 | 8410 restrictive, thus this only happens when the option was set from an insecure |
| 8411 location. Insecure in this context are: | |
| 843 | 8412 - sourcing a .vimrc or .exrc in the current directory |
| 634 | 8413 - while executing in the sandbox |
| 8414 - value coming from a modeline | |
| 8415 | |
| 8416 Note that when in the sandbox and saving an option value and restoring it, the | |
| 8417 option will still be marked as it was set in the sandbox. | |
| 8418 | |
| 8419 ============================================================================== | |
| 8420 12. Textlock *textlock* | |
| 8421 | |
| 8422 In a few situations it is not allowed to change the text in the buffer, jump | |
| 8423 to another window and some other things that might confuse or break what Vim | |
| 8424 is currently doing. This mostly applies to things that happen when Vim is | |
| 1621 | 8425 actually doing something else. For example, evaluating the 'balloonexpr' may |
| 634 | 8426 happen any moment the mouse cursor is resting at some position. |
| 8427 | |
| 8428 This is not allowed when the textlock is active: | |
| 8429 - changing the buffer text | |
| 8430 - jumping to another buffer or window | |
| 8431 - editing another file | |
| 8432 - closing a window or quitting Vim | |
| 8433 - etc. | |
| 8434 | |
| 7 | 8435 |
| 8436 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |